Professional Documents
Culture Documents
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY
GRE140
(Ver. 2.1)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE140. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
DANGER
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING
Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
When connecting this equipment via an optical fiber, do not look directly at the optical signal.
CAUTION
Earth
CAUTION
Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the power supply to the equipment is on,
as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
Power supply
If power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault, event and
disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power. This is
because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Connection cable
Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
Disposal
This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing
of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If
any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.
Plastics material
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Contents
Safety Precautions
1. Introduction
2. Application Notes
10
10
10
16
20
46
48
51
54
57
61
63
65
65
69
73
76
79
79
81
82
83
86
86
90
95
96
99
99
99
101
101
101
103
104
105
106
106
106
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.3.3 CT Failure Supervision
3.3.4 VT Failure Supervision
3.3.5 Trip Circuit Supervision
3.3.6 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
3.3.7 Failure Alarms
3.3.8 Trip Blocking
3.3.9 Setting
3.4 Recording Function
3.4.1 Fault Recording
3.4.2 Event Recording
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
3.5 Metering Function
3.6 Fault locator
3.6.1 Application
3.6.2 Distance to Fault Calculation
3.6.3 Starting Calculation
3.6.4 Displaying Location
3.6.5 Setting
4. User Interface
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
114
115
115
118
120
120
120
121
121
122
123
123
123
125
126
126
130
133
142
150
152
212
214
218
219
219
219
220
220
222
222
222
222
224
224
224
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing
6.3 Preparations
6.4 Hardware Tests
6.4.1 User Interfaces
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
6.5 Function Test
6.5.1 Measuring Element
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
6.6 Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
6.6.2 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
6.7.5 Storage
7. Putting the Relay into Service
225
225
225
225
226
226
227
227
227
229
230
231
231
244
244
245
245
247
249
249
249
250
250
250
251
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix A
252
256
257
258
259
261
Signal List
Appendix D
293
296
310
Case Outline
Appendix G
312
317
356
361
365
Technical Data
Appendix L
373
376
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
Appendix O
386
392
Ordering
The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.2.1)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
1. Introduction
GRE140 series relays provide four stage non-directional and directional overcurrent protection for
distribution networks, and back-up protection for transmission and distribution networks.
The GRE140 series has three models and provides the following protection schemes in all models.
Directional overcurrent protection and directional zero phase sequence overcurrent
protection for earth faults with definite time or inverse time characteristics
Instantaneous directional overcurrent protection and instantaneous directional zero phase
sequence overcurrent protection for earth faults
Models 400, 401 and 402 provide three-phase directional phase fault protection and directional
earth fault protection.
Models 420, 421 and 422 provide three-phase directional phase fault protection, and directional
earth and sensitive earth fault protection.
Models 700, 701 and 702 provide three-phase directional phase fault protection and directional
earth fault protection with motor protection elements.
Models 720, 721 and 722 provide three-phase directional phase fault protection, and directional
earth and sensitive earth fault protection with motor protection elements.
All models include multiple, high accuracy, overcurrent protection elements (for phase and/or
earth fault) with inverse time and definite time delay functions. All phase, earth and sensitive earth
fault overcurrent elements can be set independently subject to directional control.
In addition, GRE140 provides multi-shot, three phase auto-reclose, with independent sequences
for phase fault, and earth fault and sensitive earth fault. Auto-reclosing can also be triggered by
external protection devices.
Other protection functions are available according to model type, including thermal protection to
IEC60255-8, negative sequence overcurrent protection, under/overvoltage and under/overfrequency protections. See Table 1.1.1 for details of the protection functions available in each
model.
All models provide continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits
are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision, CT and VT supervision, and CB condition
monitoring features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted USB port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay
settings, and to access data gathered by the relays metering and recording functions.
Data available either via the relay HMI or communications ports includes the following functions.
The GRE140 series provides the following functions for all models.
Metering
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording (available via communications ports)
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE140 series and identifies the functions to be provided
by each member.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
Model Number
GRE140 -
1st
stage to
stage to
4th
1st
1st
and
2nd
1st
4th
stage
stage
stage to
4th
1st
stage to
1st
4th
stage to
and
stage
4th
stage
1st
and
2nd
stage
2nd
42_A
70_A
72_A
stage
stage
1st
40_A
stage
Reverse Power(32)
Auto-reclose (79)
Start Protection
Fault Locator
CT / VT Supervision
Self supervision
CB State Monitoring
Iy Alarm
Metering
Event records
Disturbance records
MODBUS Communication
IEC60870-5-103 Communication
IEC61850 communication
Note: The 4th stage of OC, EF, SEF, OV and UV, and the 2nd stage of UC, NOC, ZOV and NOV are for alarm.
The model of _ is 0, 1or 2 for number of BO and BI.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2. Application Notes
2.1
Stage 4
Stage 1
Figure 2.1.1
10
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Operate time
TC
TC
The inverse time overcurrent protection elements have the IDMT characteristics defined by
equation (1) in accordance with IEC 60255-151:
c
t (G ) TMS
I
1
Is
(1)
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energising current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, ,, c = constants defining curve.
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.1.1. They are illustrated in Figure 2.1.3.
Any one curve can be selected for each IDMT element by scheme switch [MC].
Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves
Curve Type (IEC 60255-151)
Curve Description
tr
0.14
0.02
13.5
80
120
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
19.61
0.491
21.6
28.2
0.1217
29.1
US CO8 Inverse
5.95
0.18
5.95
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
2.261
Note: tr and are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2).
In addition to above nine curve types, GRE140 can provide a user configurable IDMT curve. If
required, set the scheme switch [MC] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. The
11
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
Curve defining constants
Range
Step
0.000 30.000
0.001
0.00 5.00
0.01
0.000 5.000
0.001
tr
0.000 30.000
0.001
0.00 5.00
0.01
1000
100
100
10
10
LTI
NI
1
MI
VI
VI
CO2
CO8
EI
EI
0.1
0.1
1
10
100
10
100
Figure 2.1.3
IDMT Characteristics
12
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic can be applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating
characteristics.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Dependent time reset
The dependent time resetting characteristic complies with the dependent time reset characteristics
described in IEC 60255-151 which are specific only to the IEEE/US operate characteristics, and
are defined by the following equation:
tr
t (G) RTMS
I
1 I S
(2)
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energising current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
tr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is zero
(see Table 2.1.1),
RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.
= constants defining curve.
Figure 2.1.4 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.
13
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Time (s)
100.00
EI
VI
10.00
CO8
MI
CO2
1.00
0.1
1
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.4
TC
TC
14
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.1.1.3 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
In conjunction with inverse time overcurrent protection, additional overcurrent elements provide
instantaneous or definite time overcurrent protection.
OC1 to OC4 and EF1 to EF4 are phase fault and earth fault protection elements, respectively. Each
element is programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation. (In case of
instantaneous operation, the delayed pick-up timer is set to 0.00.) The phase fault elements operate
on a phase segregated basis, although tripping is for three phase only.
Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
When applied to radial networks with several feeder sections where ZL (impedance of the
protected line) is large enough compared with ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power
source), and the magnitude of the fault current for a local end fault is much greater (3 times or
more, or (ZL+ZS)/ZS3, for example) than that for a remote end fault under the condition that ZS
is maximum, the pick-up current can be set sufficiently high so that the operating zone of the
elements do not reach the remote end of the feeder, and thus instantaneous and selective protection
can be applied.
This high-set overcurrent protection is applicable and effective particularly for feeders near the
power source where the setting is feasible, whereas longer tripping times would otherwise have to
be accepted.
As long as the associated inverse time overcurrent protection is correctly coordinated, the
instantaneous protection does not require setting coordination with the downstream section.
Figure 2.1.6 shows operating times for instantaneous overcurrent protection in conjunction with
inverse time overcurrent protection. The shaded area shows the reduction in operating time by
applying the instantaneous overcurrent protection. The instantaneous protection zone decreases as
ZS increases.
Operate time
TC
TC
The current setting is set 1.3 to 1.5 times higher than the probable maximum fault current in the
event of a fault at the remote end. The maximum fault current for elements OC1 to OC4 is
obtained in case of three-phase faults, while the maximum fault current for elements EF1 to EF4 is
obtained in the event of single phase earth faults.
2.1.1.4 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
When applying inverse time overcurrent protection for a feeder system as shown in Figure 2.1.7,
well coordinated protection can be achieved with the fuses covering branch circuit faults and
high-speed protection for the feeder faults being provided by adding staged definite time
overcurrent protection with time-graded OC2 and OC3 or EF2 and EF3 elements.
15
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Fuse
GRE140
Figure 2.1.7
Configuring the inverse time element OC1 (and EF1) and time graded elements OC2 and OC3 (or
EF2 and EF3) as shown in Figure 2.1.8, the characteristic of overcurrent protection can be
improved to coordinate with the fuse characteristic.
Time (s)
OC1
OC2
OC3
Fuse
Current (amps)
Figure 2.1.8
2.1.2
16
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
The various overcurrent elements of GRE140 are independently programmable for directional
operation. Therefore, elements OC2 and EF2 could be set for non-directional operation to provide
time-delayed back-up protection for the load.
A
GRE140
Load
GRE140
Non-directional
Directional
B
GRE140
GRE140
Non-directional
Figure 2.1.9
Directional
0.4s
GRD140
1.0s
GRD140
GRD140
GRD140
0.1s
0.7s
GRD140
1.3s
Non-directional
GRD140
Figure 2.1.10
0.4s
GRD140
1.0s
GRD140
GRD140
0.1s
GRD140
1.3s
Non-directional
0.7s
17
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
G1
G2
c
F2
Figure 2.1.11
F1
The protection is performed by setting the directional element at points 1, 2 and 3 to operate only
when the fault current (F1: solid lines) flows in from source G1 and at points a, b and c to operate only
when the fault current (F2: dotted lines) flows in from source G2, with grading provided by time
delays.
2.1.2.2 Directional Characteristics
Figure 2.1.12 illustrates the directional characteristic, with the forward operate zone shaded. The
reverse zone is simply a mirror image of the forward zone. The forward operate zone or reverse
operate zone is selectable by the scheme switch [OC-DIR], [EF-DIR], [SE-DIR] and [NC-DIR].
As shown in Figure 2.1.13, each directional characteristic is composed of a forward directional
characteristic, reverse directional characteristic and overcurrent thresholds.
Boundary of Operation
(leading)
CA + 90
Boundary of Operation
CA + 90
+87.5(leading)
CA + 60
CA + 60
CA + 30
CA + 30
10 x Is
10 x Is
5 x Is
5 x Is
CA
CA - 180
Reverse
Operate
Zone
Forward
Operate
Zone
CA
CA - 180
Reverse
Operate
Zone
CA - 30
Forward
Operate
Zone
CA - 60
CA - 90
CA - 60
CA - 90
Boundary of Operation
(lagging)
Boundary of Operation
- 87.5(lagging)
Figure 2.1.12
Reverse
CA - 30
Stage
4
3
2
1
Directional (Forward)
&
1-4
Forward
&
1-4
Reverse
+: lead angle
0
: lag angle
V pol
Directional (Reverse)
Forward
I
: Characteristic angle
Figure 2.1.13
Directional element
18
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Polarising signals for directional elements are shown in Figure 2.1.14. Polarisation for directional
phase overcurrent element OC is achieved by the 90 quadrature method, whereby the phase angle
of each current is compared with the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases. Since
the voltage inputs to the relay will normally be connected phase to neutral, the polarising phase to
phase voltages are derived internally. The polarizing negative sequence voltage is also derived
internally. The polarizing zero sequence voltage is derived from a residual voltage or internally
depending on the model. Direction is determined in each case by measuring the phase angle of the
current with respect to a suitable polarising quantity. Table 2.1.2 summarises the current inputs
and their respective polarising signals. For details of the relationship between directional earth
fault protection and power system earthing, see Appendix B.
(a)
Vbc90
V2
(b)
Ve
(c)
Va
Va
Va
Ie
Ia
Vc
Vbc
I2
Vb
Vc
Vc
Vb
Vb
aVc
a Vb
Ve
V2
Figure 2.1.14
Table 2.1.2
Directional element
Current Input
Polarising Signal
Comment
OC-A
Ia
Vbc90 (*)
OC-B
Ib
Vca90 (*)
OC-C
Ic
Vab90 (*)
EF
Ie
-Ve
SEF
Ise
-Ve
NOC
I2
-V2
Note (*): The quadrature voltages used for polarization of the phase fault elements are automatically
phase-shifted by +90, such that they are in phase with the faulted phase voltage under
normal conditions. Therefore the faulted phase current will normally lag its polarizing
voltage under fault conditions and should be set with a negative characteristic angle. Refer to
section 2.1.3.3 for guidance on choice of settings.
In the event of a close up three phase fault, all three polarising signals will collapse below the
minimum threshold. Voltage memory provides a temporary polarising signal in these
circumstances. GRE140 maintains the polarising signal for a short period by reconstructing the
pre-fault voltages and judges the fault direction. After the voltage memory has disappeared, the
direction judgement is effective while the fault current flows as shown in Figure 2.1.15.
19
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Phase difference calculation
|V||I|cos() 0
&
1
F/F
Amplitude calculation
|l|OCset
Output of
directional element
&
Amplitude calculation
|Vpol|Vset
(Note) OCset: Current setting
Vset : Voltage setting. In the case of OC and NOC, Vset = 1V fixed.
Figure 2.1.15
2.1.3
Scheme Logic
The directional control characteristic can be selected to Forward (FWD) or Reverse (REV) or
Non-directional (Non) by scheme switch setting [OC-DIR] (not shown in Figures 2.1.16 to
2.1.19). If instantaneous tripping is required, signal OC_INST_TP is assigned using the PLC
function.
OC1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure
2.1.16. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] to D and trip signal OC1
TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOC1. The inverse time protection is selected by
setting [MOC1] to any one of IEC, IEEE, US or C and then setting [MOC1C] according
to the required IDMT characteristic, and trip signal OC1_TRIP is given.
The OC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.17. The scheme logic of OC2 is the same as that of the OC1.
Figure 2.1.18 and Figure 2.1.19 show the scheme logic of the definite time phase overcurrent
protection OC3 and OC4. The OC3 and OC4 give trip and alarm signals OC3_TRIP and
OC4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOC3 and TOC4 respectively.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the OC1 to OC4 protection with the scheme switches
[OC1-2F] to [OC4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.8.1.
The trip mode of OC1 TRIP to OC4 ALARM can be selected by setting [OCTP] to 3POR(any
one of 3 phases) or 2OUTOF3(2 out of 3 phases) gate. With 2OUTOF3 selected, the trip
signal is not issued during a single-phase fault. The switch [OCTP] is common for OC1 to OC4
protection.
The OC1 to OC4 protection provide the delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or
delayed trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in
multi-shot reclosing (see Section 2.5.). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip)
and reclose initiating (ARC) is executed:
Trip (1st) ARC (1st) Trip (2nd) ARC (2nd) Trip (3rd) ARC (3rd) Trip (4th)
ARC (4th) Trip (5th) ARC (5th) Trip (6th)
Each tripping is selected by setting [OC-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip),
20
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Set(delayed trip by TOC and [MOC1] setting) or Off(blocked).
The OC1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.1.3.6.
GRE140 incorporates a VT failure supervision function (VTFS). (See Section 3.3.4.) When the
VTFS detects a VT failure, it can alarm and block the OC1 to OC4 protection by the scheme
switch [VTF-OC1BLK] to [VTF-OC4BLK] respectively.
The OC1 to OC4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] to [OC4EN] or the
PLC signals OC1_BLOCK to OC4_BLOCK respectively.
TOC1
101
102
OC1 B
103
C
[OC1-2F]
&
&
&
&
&
&
262
263
1
264
OC1-A TRIP
OC1-B TRIP
OC1-C TRIP
261
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
OC1 TRIP
ICD
104
&
A
OC1
B
(INST)
C
&
&
105
&
&
106
[OCTP]
&
OC1-INST
1696 OC1_INST_TP
&
&
&
&
"3POR"
3POR
2OUTOF3
"2OUTOF3"
&
[MOC1]
+
"IEC"
[OC1-EN]
+ "ON"
"IEEE"
OC1 ON
"US"
"C"
1536 OC1_BLOCK
[OC1-TP1]
+
&
Non VTF
[VTF OC1-BLK]
+ "OFF"
OC1HS B
C
SHOT NUM6
"D"
From Figure
2.5.1.
119
120
121
[OC1-TP6]
+
OC1-A HS
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
OC1-INST
&
OC1 OFF
&
&
OC1-B HS
OC1-C HS
Figure 2.1.16
21
OC1 ON
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TOC2
107
108
OC2 B
109
C
[OC2-2F]
&
&
&
&
&
&
266
OC2-A TRIP
267
OC2-B TRIP
1
268
OC2-C TRIP
265
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
OC2 TRIP
ICD
110
&
&
&
112
&
&
1697 OC2_INST_TP
&
&
"3POR"
[OCTP]
&
OC2-INST
3POR
2OUTOF3
"2OUTOF3"
&
[MOC2]
+
&
&
111
OC2 B
(INST)
C
"IEC"
[OC2-EN]
+ "ON"
"IEEE"
SHOT NUM1
OC2 ON
"US"
From Figure
2.5.1.
&
SHOT NUM6
[OC2-TP1]
+
"D"
1537 OC2_BLOCK
115
&
TOC3
&
114
113
A
OC3 B
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
[OC2-TP6]
+
OC2 OFF
&
Figure 2.1.17
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"C"
OC2-INST
&
&
[OC3-2F]
270
271
1
272
OC3-A TRIP
OC3-B TRIP
OC3-C TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
269
OC3 TRIP
ICD
[OC3-EN]
+ "ON"
OC3 ON
1538 OC3_BLOCK
&
&
&
[OCTP]
&
1
1698 OC3_INST_TP
SHOT NUM1
SHOT NUM6
[OC3-TP1]
+
[OC3-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.18
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"3POR"
3POR
"2OUTOF3"
From Figure
2.5.1.
&
&
OC3-INST
&
&
OC3-INST
&
2OUTOF3
OC3 OFF
&
OC3 ON
&
22
OC2 ON
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TO C4
11 6
&
O C4 B
117
118
&
&
[OC4-2F]
+
ICD
"Block"
2 74
2 75
1
276
O C4-A_ALARM
OC4-B_ALARM
OC4-C_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
2 73
&
1
[O C4-EN]
+
"O N "
O C4 ON
1539 OC4_BLOCK
&
&
&
&
[O CTP]
&
1
1699 O C4_INST_TP
S HOT NU M1
S HOT NUM6
[O C4-TP1]
+
[OC4-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.19
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"O FF"
"3POR "
3POR
"2O UTOF3"
From F igure
2.5.1.
&
&
OC4-INST
OC 4_ALAR M
&
OC4-INST
&
2O UTO F3
O C 4 O FF
&
O C4 O N
&
23
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
ARC (4th) Trip (5th) ARC (5th) Trip (6th)
Each tripping is selected by setting [EF-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip),
Set(delayed trip by TEF and [MEF1] setting) or Off(blocked).
EF1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.1.3.6.
GRE140 incorporates a VT failure supervision function (VTFS) and a CT failure supervision
function (CTFS). When the VTFS or CTFS detects a VT failure or a CT failure, it can alarm and
block the EF1 to EF4 protection by the scheme switch [VTF-EF1BLK] to [VTF-EF4BLK] or
[CTF-EF1BLK] to [CTF-EF4BLK] respectively.
The EF1 to EF4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [EF1EN] to [EF4EN] or the
PLC signals EF1_BLOCK to EF4_BLOCK respectively.
EF1
EF1-REV
131
&
&
[EF1-2F]
285
CURREV-EF1
TEF1
EF1_CARRIER
&
281
&
EF1_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
ICD
EF1
(INST)
132
&
&
EF1-INST
1700 EF1_INST_TP
1548 EF1_PERMIT
[EF1-EN]
+ "OFF"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
1
Delayed trip control:
EF1 ON
"US"
SHOT NUM1
From Figure
2.5.1.
"C"
"D"
1
Non VTF
[VTF-EF1BLK]
+ "OFF"
&
[EF1-TP1]
+
Non CTF
[CTF-EF1BLK]
+ "OFF"
EF1HS
SHOT NUM6
1544 EF1_BLOCK
138
[EF1-EN]
+ "ON"
[MEF1]
[EF1-TP6]
+
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
&
EF1 OFF
&
&
EF1 HS
Figure 2.1.20
24
EF1-INST
EF1 ON
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
EF2-REV
13 3
EF2
[EF 2- 2F ]
+
EF2_TRIP
13 4
&
&
E F2 -INS T
17 01 EF2_I NST_TP
15 49 E F2 _PE RMIT
[EF2-E N]
+
"O FF"
"IEC"
"IEE E"
1
Dela yed trip co ntrol:
E F2 ON
"US"
[E F2-E N]
+
"O N"
[ME F2]
SHOT NUM1
Fr om Fi gur e
2.5.1.
"C"
"D"
&
&
No n VTF
[VTF-E F2 BLK ]
+
"OFF"
[E F2-TP1 ]
+
Figure 2.1.21
[EF3-2F]
E F2 O N
&
CURREV-EF3
TEF3
&
EF3-REV
135
"Inst"
"Set"
"O FF"
[EF2-TP6]
+
E F2 OFF
&
Non CTF
[CTF-EF2B LK]
+
"O FF"
&
"Ins t"
"S et"
"OFF"
EF2-INST
SHOT N UM6
EF3
282
&
&
EF 2
(IN ST)
EF2_CA RRIER
&
0. 00 - 300.0 0s
ICD
&
&
286
CURRE V-EF2
TE F2
287
&
EF3_CARRIER
283
&
EF3_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
ICD
&
[EF3-EN]
+ "OFF"
1550 EF3_PERMIT
EF3 ON
EF3-INST
1702 EF3_INST_TP
1546 EF3_BLOCK
SHOT NUM1
Non VTF
[VTF-EF3BLK]
+ "OFF"
&
From Figure
2.5.1.
SHOT NUM6
1
[EF3-TP1]
+
Non CTF
[CTF-EF3BLK]
+ "OFF"
[EF3-EN]
+ "ON"
[EF3-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.22
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
EF3-INST
&
EF3 OFF
&
&
25
EF3 ON
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
EF4
EF4-REV
135
&
[EF4-2F]
CURREV-EF4
TEF4
288
&
EF4_CARRIER
284
&
EF4_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
ICD
&
[EF4-EN]
+ "OFF"
1551 EF4_PERMIT
EF4 ON
EF4-INST
[EF4-EN]
+ "ON"
1703 EF4_INST_TP
SHOT NUM1
1547 EF4_BLOCK
From Figure
2.5.1.
&
Non VTF
&
SHOT NUM6
[VTF-EF4BLK]
+ "OFF"
1
[EF4-TP1]
+
Non CTF
[CTF-EF4BLK]
+ "OFF"
[EF4-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.23
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
EF4 OFF
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
EF4-INST
EF4 ON
&
EF1-REV
&
&
EF2-REV
EF3-REV
EF4-REV
&
&
&
&
&
&
0.02 s
[EF1-DIR] "REV"
+
[EF1-DIR] "FWD"
+
[EF2-DIR]
"REV"
+
[EF2-DIR] "FWD"
+
[EF3-DIR] "REV"
+
[EF4-DIR]
"REV"
+
CURREV
+
137
0.00 - 10.00s
[EF3-DIR] "FWD"
+
"1"
"2"
"3"
"4"
[EF4-DIR]
"FWD"
+
Figure 2.1.24
26
&
CURREV-EF1
&
CURREV-EF2
&
CURREV-EF3
&
CURREV-EF4
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.1.3.3 Setting for OC and EF protection
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection
and their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OC
95 95
45
OC characteristic angle
OC1
0.1 25.0 A
0.1 A
5.0 A
TOC1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
TOC1M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TOC1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
TOC1RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC2
0.1 25.0 A
0.1 A
25.0 A
TOC2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TOC2M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TOC2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
TOC2RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC3
0.1 250.0 A
0.1 A
50.0 A
TOC3
0.00 300.0 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OC4
0.1 250.0 A
0.1 A
100.0 A
TOC4
0.0 300.0 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
EF
95 95
45
EF characteristic angle
EFV
0.5 100.0 V
0.1 V
3.0 V
EF1
0.1 25.0 A
0.1 A
1.5 A
TEF1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
TEF1M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TEF1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
TEF1RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF2
0.1 25.0 A
0.1 A
15.0 A
TEF2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TEF2M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TEF2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
27
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
TEF2RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF3
0.1 250.0 A
0.1 A
25.0 A
TEF3
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
EF4
0.1 250.0 A
0.1 A
50.0 A
TEF4
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
TREBK
0.00 10.00 s
0.01 s
0.10
[OC1EN]
Off / On
On
OC1 Enable
[OC1-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[MOC1]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
[MOC1C]
MOC1C-IEC
MOC1C-IEEE
MOC1C-US
NI
MI
CO2
[OC1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
[VTF-OC1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[OC2EN]
Off / On
Off
OC2 Enable
[OC2-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[MOC2]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
[MOC2C]
MOC2C-IEC
MOC2C-IEEE
MOC2C-US
NI
MI
CO2
[OC2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
[VTF-OC2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[OC3EN]
Off / On
Off
OC3 Enable
[OC3-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[VTF-OC3BLK]
Off / On
Off
[OC4EN]
Off / On
Off
OC4 Enable
[OC4-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[VTF-OC4BLK]
Off / On
Off
[OCTP]
3POR / 2OUTOF3
3POR
OC trip mode
[EF1EN]
Off / On / POP
On
EF1 Enable
[EF1-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[MEF1]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
[MEF1C]
MEF1C-IEC
MEF1C-IEEE
MEF1C-US
NI
MI
CO2
[EF1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
[VTF-EF1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[CTF-EF1BLK]
Off / On
Off
28
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
Range
[EF2EN]
Step
Default
Remarks
Off / On / POP
Off
EF2 Enable
[EF2-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[MEF2]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
[MEF2C]
MEF2C-IEC
MEF2C-IEEE
MEF2C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
[EF2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
[VTF-EF2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[CTF-EF2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[EF3EN]
Off / On / POP
Off
EF3 Enable
[EF3-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[VTF-EF3BLK]
Off / On
Off
[CTF-EF3BLK]
Off / On
Off
[EF4EN]
Off / On / POP
Off
EF4 Enable
[EF4-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
[VTF-EF4BLK]
Off / On
Off
[CTF-EF4BLK]
Off / On
Off
CURREV
Off / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
Off
TEF1:
EF1EN:
POP
EF1-DIR:
FWR
EF2:
TEF2:
0.00s
EF2EN:
POP
EF2-DIR:
REV
CURREV: 2
(b) Setting of BO (Binary Output)
The signal EF1-CR (No.285) is assigned to BOn. --- carrier signal send BO
(c) Setting of BI (Binary Input)
The EF1 protection permission is assigned to BIn. --- carrier signal receive BI
BIn SNS: Norm
29
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
(2) BOP (Blocking overreach protection)
(a) Setting of EF element
EF1:
TEF1:
EF1EN:
POP
EF1-DIR:
FWR
EF2:
TEF2:
0.30s (minimum) --- coordination time for blocking carrier signal receiving
EF2EN:
POP
EF2-DIR:
REV
CURREV: 2
(b) Setting of BO (Binary Output)
The signal EF2-CR (No.286) is assigned to BOn. --- carrier signal send BO
(c) Setting of BI (Binary Input)
The EF1 protection permission is assigned to BIn. --- carrier signal receive BI
BIn SNS: Inv
[Time Overcurrent Protection Setting]
(1) Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
Current setting
In Figure 2.1.25, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in the
event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a fault
on the next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at
remote end F3.
To calculate the minimum fault current, phase-to-phase faults are assumed for the phase
overcurrent element, and phase to earth faults for the residual overcurrent element, assuming the
probable maximum source impedance. When considering the fault at F3, the remote end of the
next section is assumed to be open.
The higher the current setting, the more effective the inverse characteristic. On the other hand, the
lower the setting, the more dependable the operation. For positive and dependable operation a
setting should be chosen that is lower than the minimum fault current; typical settings of around 1
to 1.5 times less than the minimum fault current are usual in order to ensure the most effective use
of the inverse characteristic.
For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is set to the lowest
value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not
operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the
current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines.
A
F1
Figure 2.1.25
F2
F3
30
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to relays on adjacent feeders. Consider
the minimum source impedance when the current flowing through the relay reaches a maximum.
In Figure 2.1.25, in the event of a fault at F2, the operating time is set so that terminal A may
operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in the relays may sometimes be
greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time, time coordination must also
be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for
the small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a
fault at point F2 in Figure 2.1.25.
T c = T1 + T2 + Tm
where,
31
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
on the application, but recommended settings for the majority of typical applications are as
follows:
-60, for protection of plain feeders, or applications with an earthing point behind the relay
location.
-45, for protection of transformer feeders, or applications with an earthing point in front of
the relay location.
EF Characteristic Angle
When determining the characteristic angle for directional earth fault protection, the method of
system earthing must be considered. In solidly earthed systems, the earth fault current tends to lag
the faulted phase voltage (and hence the inverted residual voltage used for polarising) by a
considerable angle, due to the reactance of the source. In resistance earthed systems the angle will
be much smaller.
Commonly applied settings are as follows:
-60, for protection of solidly earthed transmission systems.
-45, for protection of solidly earthed distribution systems.
0 or -15, for protection of resistance earthed systems.
Further guidance on application of directional earth fault protection is given in appendix B.
2.1.3.4 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
The sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is applied for distribution systems earthed through high
impedance, where very low levels of fault current are expected for earth faults. Furthermore, the
SEF elements of GRE140 are also applicable to the standby earth fault protection and the high
impedance restricted earth fault protection of transformers.
GRE140 provides directional earth fault protection with more sensitive settings for use in
applications where the fault current magnitude may be very low. A 4-stage directional overcurrent
function is provided, with the first stage programmable for inverse time or definite time operation.
The second, third and fourth stages provide definite time operation.
The sensitive earth fault element includes a digital filter which rejects all harmonics other than the
fundamental power system frequency.
The sensitive earth fault quantity is measured directly, using a dedicated core balance earth fault
CT.
This input can also be used in transformer restricted earth fault applications, by the use of external
metrosils (varistors) and setting resistors.
The directional sensitive earth fault elements can be configured for directional operation in the
same way as the standard earth fault pole, by polarising against the residual voltage. An additional
restraint on operation can be provided by a Residual Power element RP, for use in protection of
power systems which utilise resonant (Petersen coil) earthing methods.
The SEF elements provide 50 times more sensitive setting ranges (1 mA to 0.25A) than the regular
earth fault protection.
Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of unwanted operation
due to harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore
the SEF elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.
The SEF protection is provided in Model 420, 421 and 422 which have a dedicated earth fault
input circuit.
32
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
The element SEF1 and SEF2 provide inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent
protection. Stage 2 of the two-stage overcurrent protection is used only for the standby earth fault
protection. The SEF3 and SEF4 provide definite time overcurrent protection.
When SEF employs IEEE or US inverse time characteristics, two reset modes are available:
definite time or dependent time resetting. If the IEC inverse time characteristic is employed,
definite time resetting is provided. For other characteristics, refer to Section 2.1.1.1.
In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is
sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.
The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to an unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current
during normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.
The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three
phase CTs, the erroneous current may also be caused by CT errors that may occur during phase
faults. Transient false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.
Standby earth fault protection
The SEF is energised from a CT connected in the power transformer low voltage neutral, and the
standby earth fault protection trips the transformer to backup the low voltage feeder protection,
and ensures that the neutral earthing resistor is not loaded beyond its rating. Stage 1 trips the
transformer low voltage circuit breaker, then stage 2 trips the high voltage circuit breaker(s) with a
time delay after stage 1 operates.
The time graded tripping is valid for transformers connected to a ring bus, banked transformers
and feeder transformers.
Restricted earth fault protection
The SEF elements can be applied in a high impedance restricted earth fault scheme (REF), for
protection of a star-connected transformer winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through an
impedance.
As shown in Figure 2.1.26, the differential current between the residual current derived from the
three-phase feeder currents and the neutral current in the neutral conductor is introduced into the
SEF elements. Two external components, a stabilising resistor and a varistor, are connected as
shown in the figure. The former increases the overall impedance of the relay circuit and stabilises
the differential voltage, and the latter suppresses any overvoltage in the differential circuit.
F
Power
Transformer
Varistor
GRE140
SEF input
Stabilising
Resistor
Figure 2.1.26
33
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.27 to 2.1.30 show the scheme logic for the directional sensitive earth fault protection.
The directional control characteristic can be selected to FWD or REV or Non by scheme
switch setting [SE-DIR].
Figure 2.1.27 shows the scheme logic of directional sensitive earth fault protection SEF1 with
inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite time
protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to D. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth
fault protection and stage 1 trip signal SEF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer
TSE1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to either IEC, IEEE, US or
C and then setting [MSE1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic. The element SEF1
is enabled and stage 1 trip signal SEF1_TRIP is given.
Both protections provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TSE12.
When the standby earth fault protection is applied by introducing earth current from the
transformer low voltage neutral circuit, stage 1 trip signals are used to trip the transformer low
voltage circuit breaker. If SEF1 continues operating after stage 1 has operated, the stage 2 trip
signal can be used to trip the transformer high voltage circuit breaker(s).
SEF1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.1.3.6.
The SEF2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.1.28. The scheme logic of SEF2 is the same as that of SEF1 except for SEF1-S2_TRIP.
Figure 2.1.29 and Figure 2.1.30 show the scheme logic of the definite time sensitive earth fault
protection SEF3 and SEF4. SEF3 and SEF4 give trip and alarm signals SEF3_TRIP and
SEF4_ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TSE3 and TSE4 respectively.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the SEF1 to SEF4 protection by the scheme switches
[SE1-2F] to [SE4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.8.1.
The SEF1 to SEF4 protection provide a delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or
delayed trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in
multi-shot reclosing (see Section 2.5). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip)
and reclose initiating (ARC) is executed:
Trip (1st) ARC (1st) Trip (2nd) ARC (2nd) Trip (3rd) ARC (3rd) Trip (4th)
ARC (4th) Trip (5th) ARC (5th) Trip (6th)
Each tripping is selected by setting [SE-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip),
Set(delayed trip by TSE and [MSE1] setting) or Off(blocked).
The SEF1 to SEF4 protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [SE1EN] to [SE4EN] or
PLC signals SEF1_BLOCK to SEF4_BLOCK. The SEF1 stage 2 trip of standby earth fault
protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [SE1S2].
34
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TSE1
0
t
141
SEF1
[SE1-2F]
&
&
[SE1EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
291
SEF1-S1
_TRIP
&
142
SEF1
INST
&
[SE1S2]
+
SEF1-INST
TSE12
0
t
&
"ON"
292
0.00 - 300.00s
SEF1-S2_
TRIP
1704 SEF1_INST_TP
[MSE1]
+
1552 SEF1_BLOCK
"IEC"
VTF_SE1BLK
+ "OFF"
"IEEE"
"US"
SHOT NUM1
"D"
RPF
&
RPR
&
1
1
From Figure
2.5.1.
&
&
"ON"
"OFF"
SHOT NUM6
[SE1-TP1]
+
"FWD"
[SE1 DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+
SEF1HS
&
SEF1 ON
"C"
[RPEN]
+
Non VTF
[SE1-TP6]
+
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
&
&
SEF1-INST
SE1 OFF
1
&
SEF1 HS
Figure 2.1.27
35
SEF1 ON
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TSE2
0
t
143
SEF2
[SE2-2F]
&
&
[SE2EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
293
SEF2_TRIP
&
144
SEF2
INST
&
SEF2-INST
1705 SEF2_INST_TP
[MSE2]
+
1553 SEF2_BLOCK
"IEC"
&
Non VTF
VTF_SE2BLK
+ "OFF"
"IEEE"
"US"
SEF2 ON
"C"
"D"
RPF
RPR
From Figure
2.5.1.
&
&
&
&
[SE2-TP1]
+
"OFF"
"FWD"
[SE2 DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+
&
TSE3
0
t
&
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
ICD
SEF3-INST
SEF2 ON
&
[SE3-2F]
&
145
SEF3
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
[SE2-TP6]
+
SE2 OFF
&
SEF2-INST
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
Figure 2.1.28
&
SHOT NUM6
"ON"
[RPEN]
+
[SE3EN]
+
"ON"
294
SEF3 TRIP
&
1706 SEF3_INST_TP
RPF
&
RPR
[RPEN]
+
[SE3 DIR]
+
&
1
1
1554 SEF3_BLOCK
&
&
"ON"
VTF_SE3BLK
+ "OFF"
"FWD"
SHOT NUM1
From Figure
2.5.1.
SHOT NUM6
[SE3-TP1]
+
[SE3-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.29
&
Non VTF
"OFF"
"REV"
"NON"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
SEF3 ON
&
&
&
SEF3-INST
SE3 OFF
1
&
36
SEF3 ON
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TSE4
0
t
146
SEF4
&
&
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE4-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
[SE4EN]
+
"ON"
SEF4-INST
295
SEF4_ALARM
&
1707 SEF4_INST_TP
RPF
&
RPR
[RPEN]
+
[SE4 DIR]
&
1555 SEF4_BLOCK
&
&
"ON"
VTF_SE4BLK
+ "OFF"
"OFF"
"FWD"
SHOT NUM1
"REV"
"NON"
From Figure
2.5.1.
SHOT NUM6
[SE4-TP1]
+
[SE4-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.30
&
Non VTF
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
SEF4 ON
&
&
&
SEF4-INST
SE4 OFF
1
SEF4 ON
&
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and
their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
SE
95 95
SEV
0.5 100.0
0.1 V
3.0V
SE1
0.001 0.2500 A
0.001 A
0.005 A
TSE1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
TSE1M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TSE1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
TSE1RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TSE12
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SE2
0.001 0.2500 A
0.001 A
0.010 A
TSE2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TSE2M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TSE2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
TSE2RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
37
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
SE3
0.001 0.2500 A
0.001 A
0.100 A
TSE3
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SE4
0.001 0.2500 A
0.001 A
0.200 A
TSE4
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
RP
0.00 100.00 W
0.01 W
0.00 W
[SE1EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF1 Enable
[SE1-DIR]
FWD
[MSE1]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
SEF1 characteristic
[MSE1C]
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US
NI
MI
CO2
[SE1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
[SE1S2]
Off / On
Off
[VTF-SE1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[SE2EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF2 Enable
[SE2-DIR]
FWD
[MSE2]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
SEF2 characteristic
[MSE2C]
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US
NI
MI
CO2
[SE2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
[VTF-SE2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[SE3EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF3 Enable
[SE3-DIR]
FWD
[VTF-SE3BLK]
Off / On
Off
[SE4EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF4 Enable
[SE4-DIR]
FWD
[VTF-SE4BLK]
Off / On
Off
[RPEN]
Off / On
Off
SEF
SEF is set lower than the available earth fault current and higher than the erroneous zero-phase
current. The erroneous zero-phase current exists under normal conditions due to an unbalanced
feeder configuration. The zero-phase current is normally fed from a core balance CT on the feeder,
but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may also be caused by CT errors
that may occur during phase faults.
The erroneous steady state zero-phase current can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay
front panel.
Directional SEF
Directional SEF protection is commonly applied to unearthed systems, and to systems earthed by
an inductance (Peterson Coil). Refer to appendix B for application guidance.
38
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
High impedance REF protection
CT saturation under through fault conditions results in a voltage appearing across the relay circuit.
The voltage setting of the relay circuit must be arranged such that it is greater than the maximum
voltage that can occur under through fault conditions. The worst case is considered whereby one
CT of the balancing group becomes completely saturated, while the others maintain linear
operation. The excitation impedance of the saturated CT is considered to approximate a
short-circuit.
Saturated CT
Healthy CT
Transformer
Circuit
IF
Varistor
ZM0
RCT
VS
Rsec
Figure 2.1.31
Stabilising
Resistor RS
GRE140
RL
The voltage across the relay circuit under these conditions is given by the equation:
VS = IF(RCT + RL)
where:
VS = critical setting voltage (rms)
IF = maximum prospective secondary through fault current (rms)
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
RL = Lead resistance (total resistance of the loop from the saturated CT to the relaying
point)
A series stabilising resistor is used to raise the voltage setting of the relay circuit to VS. No safety
margin is needed since the extreme assumption of unbalanced CT saturation does not occur in
practice. The series resistor value, RS, is selected as follows:
RS = VS / IS
IS is the current setting (in secondary amps) applied to the GRE140 relay. However, the actual
fault setting of the scheme includes the total current flowing in all parallel paths. That is to say that
the actual primary current for operation, after being referred to the secondary circuit, is the sum of
the relay operating current, the current flowing in the varistor, and the excitation current of all the
parallel connected CTs at the setting voltage. In practice, the varistor current is normally small
enough that it can be neglected. Hence:
IS IP / N 4Imag
where:
IS = setting applied to GRE140 relay (secondary amps)
IP = minimum primary current for operation (earth fault sensitivity)
N = CT ratio
Imag = CT magnetising (excitation) current at voltage VS
More sensitive settings for IS allow for greater coverage of the transformer winding, but they also
39
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
require larger values of RS to ensure stability, and the increased impedance of the differential
circuit can result in high voltages being developed during internal faults. The peak voltage, Vpk,
developed may be approximated by the equation:
Vpk = 2 2 Vk I F R S Vk
where:
Vk = CT knee point voltage
IF = maximum prospective secondary current for an internal fault
When a Metrosil is used for the varistor, it should be selected with the following characteristics:
V = CI
where:
V = instantaneous voltage
I = instantaneous current
= constant, normally in the range 0.20 - 0.25
C = constant.
The C value defines the characteristics of the metrosil, and should be chosen according to the
following requirements:
1. The current through the metrosil at the relay voltage setting should be as low as possible,
preferably less than 30mA for a 1Amp CT and less than 100mA for a 5Amp CT.
2. The voltage at the maximum secondary current should be limited, preferably to 1500Vrms.
Restricted earth fault schemes should be applied with high accuracy CTs whose knee point voltage
Vk is chosen according to the equation:
Vk 2VS
where VS is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
2.1.3.5 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The negative sequence overcurrent protection (NOC) is used to detect asymmetrical faults
(phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults) with high sensitivity in conjunction with phase
overcurrent protection and residual overcurrent protection. It also used to detect load unbalance
conditions.
Phase overcurrent protection must be set to a lower sensitivity when the load current is large but
NOC sensitivity is not affected by the magnitude of the load current except in the case of the
erroneous negative sequence current experienced due to the unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines.
For some earth faults, only a small zero sequence current is fed while the negative sequence
current is comparatively large. This is more likely the case for a fault occurring at the remote end
of a feeder having a small reverse zero sequence impedance and most of the zero sequence current
flows to the remote end.
In these cases, NOC backs up the phase overcurrent and residual overcurrent protection. The NOC
can also be used to protect the rotor of a rotating machine from over heating by detecting a load
unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to a rotating machine due to the loss of a phase can also
lead to increases in negative sequence current and in machine heating.
GRE140 provides directional negative sequence overcurrent protection with definite time
40
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
characteristics.
Two independent elements NOC1 and NOC2 are provided for tripping and alarm purposes. These
elements can be directionalised by polarising against the negative sequence voltage.
The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and the scheme switch
[APPLCT] is set to 3P.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.32 and 2.1.33 show the scheme logic of directional negative sequence overcurrent
protection NOC1 and NOC2. The directional control characteristic can be selected to Forward
or Reverse or Non by scheme switch setting [NC1-DIR] and [NC2-DIR] (not shown in
Figures 2.1.32 and 2.1.33).
Figure 2.1.32 shows the scheme logic of directional negative sequence overcurrent protection
NOC1 with inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite
time protection is selected by setting [MNC1] to D, and the trip signal NOC1 TRIP is given via
delayed pick-up timer TNC1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MNC1] to any
one of IEC, IEEE, US or C and then setting [MNC1C] according to the required IDMT
characteristic, and the trip signal NOC1_TRIP is given.
The NOC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.1.33. The scheme logic of NOC2 is the same as that of the NOC1.
When the VTFS or CTFS detects a VT failure or a CT failure, it can alarm and block the NOC1
and NOC2 protection by the scheme switch [VTF-NC1BLK] and [VTF-NC2BLK] or
[CTF-NC1BLK] and [CTF- NC2BLK] respectively.
The NOC1 and NOC2 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [NC1EN], [NC2EN] and
[APPLCT] or the PLC signals NOC1_BLOCK and NOC2_BLOCK respectively.
The scheme switch [APPLCT] is available in which three-phase overcurrent protection can be
selected. The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL-CT]
is set to 3P.
TNC1
169
NOC1
&
&
311
NOC1_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[NC1-2F
ICD
"Block" &
NOC1
(INST)
170
&
[NOC1]
+
"IEC"
"IEEE"
[NC1-EN]
+ "OFF"
"US"
"C"
"D"
1560 NOC1_BLOCK
Non VTF
[VTF-NC1BLK]
+ "OFF"
&
Non CTF
[CTF-NC1BLK]
+ "OFF"
Figure 2.1.32
41
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TNC2
171
NOC2
&
&
312
NOC2_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[NC2-2F
ICD
"Block" &
NOC2
(INST)
185
&
[NOC1]
+
[NC2-EN]
+ "OFF"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
"D"
1561 NOC2_BLOCK
&
Non VTF
[VTF-NC2BLK]
+ "OFF"
Non CTF
[CTF-NC2BLK]
+ "OFF"
Figure 2.1.33
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the NOC protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
NC
95 95
45
NCV
0.5 25.0 V
0.1 V
3.0 V
NC1
0.5 10.0 A
0.1 A
2.0 A
TNC1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TNC1M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TNC1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
TNC1RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
NC2
0.5 - 10.0 A
0.1 A
1.0 A
TNC2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TNC2M
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
TNC2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
TNC2RM
0.010 1.500
0.001
1.000
[NC1EN]
Off / On
Off
NOC1 Enable
[MNC1C]
MNC1C-IEC
MNC1C-IEEE
MNC1C-US
[NC1R]
NI
MI
CO2
DEF / DEP
DEF
42
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
Range
[CTF-NC1BLK]
Step
Default
Remarks
Off / On
Off
[VTF-NC1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[NC2EN]
Off / On
Off
NOC2 Enable
[MNC2C]
MNC2C-IEC
MNC2C-IEEE
MNC2C-US
NI
MI
CO2
[NC2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
[CTF-NC2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[VTF-NC2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[APPLCT]
3P / 2P / 1P
3P
Sensitive setting of NOC1 and NOC2 thresholds is restricted by the negative phase sequence
current normally present on the system. The negative phase sequence current is measured in the
relay continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel along with the
maximum value. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage and to set
NOC1 and NOC2 to 130 to 150% of the maximum value displayed.
The delay time setting TNC1 and TNC2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements
NOC1 and NOC2. The minimum operating time of the NOC elements is around 200ms.
Under fault conditions, the negative sequence current lags the negative sequence voltage by an
angle dependent upon the negative sequence source impedance of the system. This should be
accounted for by setting the NOC characteristic angle setting [NC] when the negative sequence
protection is used in directional mode. Typical settings are as follows:
60 for transmission systems
+45 for distribution systems
2.1.3.6 Application of Protection Inhibits
All GRE140 protection elements can be blocked by a binary input signal. This feature is useful in
a number of applications.
Blocked Overcurrent Protection
Conventional time-graded definite time overcurrent protection can lead to excessive fault
clearance times being experienced for faults closest to the source. The implementation of a
blocked overcurrent scheme can eliminate the need for grading margins and thereby greatly
reduce fault clearance times. Such schemes are suited to radial feeder circuits, particularly where
substations are close together and pilot cables can be economically run between switchboards.
Figure 2.1.34 shows the operation of the scheme.
Instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up signals OC1HS, EF1HS and SEF1HS of OC1,
EF1 and SEF1 elements are allocated to any of the binary output relays and used as a blocking
signal. OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protections are set with a short delay time. (For pick-up signals, refer
to Figure 2.1.16, 2.1.20 and 2.1.27.)
For a fault at F as shown, each relay sends the blocking signal to its upstream neighbor. The signal
is input as a binary input signal OC2 BLOCK, EF2 BLOCK and SEF2 BLOCK at the receiving
end, and blocks the OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protection. Minimum protection delays of 50ms are
recommended for the OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protection, to ensure that the blocking signal has time
43
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
to arrive before protection operation.
Inverse time graded operation with elements OC1, EF1 and SEF1 are available with the scheme
switch [MOC1], [MEF1] and [MSE1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of a
failure of the blocked scheme.
F
GRE140
Trip
GRE140
GR E140
OC2/EF2/SEF2
OC2/EF2/SEF2
High
Speed
Bl ock
OCHS/EFHS/
SEF HS
Figure 2.1.34
OC2/EF2/SEF2
High
Speed
Block
OCHS/EFHS/
SEF HS
44
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
GRD140
OC1/EF1/SEF1
High Speed Block to Incomer for Feeder Fault
OC2/ EF2/SEF2
Fast Trip
F2
Feeder Trip
Feeder Trip
Feeder Trip
GRD140
GRD140
OC1/EF1/SEF1
OC1/EF1/SEF1
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
GRD140
OC1/EF1/SEF1
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
F1
Figure 2.1.35
Figure 2.1.36 shows one half of a two-incomer station. A directional overcurrent relay protects the
incomer, with non-directional overcurrent units on the feeders.
G RD 1 4 0
D ire ctio na l
(IDM TL )
O C1/E F 1/S E F 1
D e la ye d B a ck- up T rip
Trip B us S e ctio n a nd B us C o up le r
(50 m s )
O C2/E F 2/S E F 2
(25 0m s )
O C3/E F 3/S E F 3
Hig h S p e e d B lo ck
Trip In co m e r
B us S e ctio n
B us C o up le r
F e e d e r T rip
GRD 140
No n -d ire ctio na l
F e e d e r T rip
GRD 140
No n -d ire ctio na l
O C1/E F 1/S E F 1
O C1/E F 1/S E F 1
O C HS /E F HS /
S E F HS
O C HS /E F HS /
S E F HS
Figure 2.1.36
For a fault on an outgoing feeder, the non-directional feeder protection sends a hardwired blocking
signal to inhibit operation of both incomers, the signal OCHS, EFHS and SEFHS being generated
by the instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up outputs. Meanwhile, the feeder is tripped
by the OC1, EF1 and SEF1 elements, programmed with inverse time delays and set to grade with
downstream protections.
The incomer protection is programmed for directional operation such that it will only trip for
faults on the busbar side of its CTs. Hence, although a fault on the HV side may be back-fed from
the busbars, the relay does not trip.
45
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
For a fault in the busbar zone, the GRE140 is programmed to trip the bus section and bus coupler
circuit breakers via its instantaneous elements OC2, EF2 and SEF2 set with short definite time
delay settings (minimum 50ms to provide a margin to allow for safe receipt of feeder protection
blocking signals for faults occurring on the outgoing feeders). This first stage trip maintains
operation of half the substation in the event of a busbar fault or incomer fault in the other half.
If the first stage trip fails to clear the fault, a second stage trip is given to the local incomer circuit
breaker via instantaneous elements OC3, EF3 and SEF3 after a longer delay, thus isolating a fault
on the local busbar.
GRE140 integrated circuit breaker fail protection can be used to provide additional back-trips
from the feeder protection to the incomer, and from the incomer to the HV side of the power
transformer, in the event of the mainSetting
trip value
failing to|I|clear
fault.
UC1the
setting
Operating zone
&
UC1
&
UC2
A further development of this scheme might see directional relays being applied directly to the bus
section and bus coupler circuit0.04
breakers, to speed up
|I| operation
UC2 setting of the scheme.
0
This scheme assumes that a busbar fault cannot be fed from the outgoing feeder circuits. In the
case of an interconnected system, where a remote power
|I| 0.04 source may provide a back-feed into the
substation, directional relays must also be applied to protect the feeders.
2.1.4
Setting value
Operating zone
0.04
0
&
UC1
&
UC2
|I| 0.04
Figure 2.1.37
Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarm purposes. The
elements are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The undercurrent element operates on a per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is threephase only.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.38 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.
The undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output UC1 TRIP and UC2 ALARM through delayed
pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.
This protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or PLC signals UC1
BLOCK and UC2 BLOCK.
46
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Further, this protection can be blocked when CT failure (CTF) is detected.
161
&
&
&
162
UC1 B
163
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
166
I
0.04A
303
304
301
TUC2
0
306
307
308
0.00 - 300.00s
[UC2EN]
"ON"
165
UC2 B
302
164
TUC1
0
0.00 - 300.00s
[UC1EN]
+
305
UC1-A_TRIP
UC1-B_TRIP
UC1-C_TRIP
UC1_TRIP
UC2-A_ALARM
UC2-B_ALARM
UC2-C_ALARM
UC2_ALARM
"ON"
B
C
NON CTF
+
[CTF_UC1BLK]
1568 UC1_BLOCK
&
&
"OFF"
1
[CTF_UC2BLK]
1569 UC2_BLOCK
"OFF"
In : Rated current
Figure 2.1.38
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
UC1
0.10 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.40 A
TUC1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
UC2
0.10 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.20 A
TUC2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
[UC1EN]
Off / On
Off
UC1 Enable
[UC2EN]
Off / On
Off
UC2 Enable
[CTF-UC1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[CTF-UC2BLK]
Off / On
Off
47
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.1.5
t
I2
1 e 100%
(1)
I 2AOL
where:
= thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
= thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the
point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay
gives a trip output when = 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to
the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from cold or from hot.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of the thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for
cold and hot. The cold curve is a special case of the hot curve where prior load current Ip is
zero, catering for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
I2
t =Ln 2 2
I I AOL
(2)
I2 I 2
t =Ln 2 2P
I I AOL
(3)
where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
= thermal time constant (seconds)
Ln = natural logarithm
Figure 2.1.39 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings. The left-hand
chart shows the cold condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously un-loaded
system. The right-hand chart shows the hot condition where an overload is switched onto a
system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.
48
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
1000
1000
100
10
100
50
100
10
100
0.1
50
20
0.1
10
20
10
5
2
1
0.01
5
2
0.01
1
10
Figure 2.1.39
0.001
1
10
Thermal Curves
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.40 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM_ALARM and trip signal THM_TRIP. The alarm threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAEN] and [THMEN]
respectively or PLC signals THMA_BLOCK and THM_BLOCK.
167
&
A
THM
T
309
&
168
&
310
&
THM_ALARM
THM_TRIP
[THMAEN]
+
"ON"
[THMEN]
"ON"
1573 THMA_BLOCK
1572 THM_BLOCK
Figure 2.1.40
49
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their
setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
THM
0.50 10.0 A
0.01 A
1.00 A
THMIP
0.0 5.0 A
0.01 A
0.00 A
TTHM
0.1 min
10.0 min
THMA
50 99 %
1%
80 %
[THMEN]
Off / On
Off
Thermal OL enable
[THMAEN]
Off / On
Off
Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal
element, and is only active when testing ([THMRST] = ON).
50
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.1.6
E1A
E1B
1 k1
k1
k1 Z 1
I1F
I1F
(1-k1)Z1
E1B
E
Positive phase sequence
k2Z2
I2F
I2F
(1-k2)Z2
I0F
(1-k0)Z0
I0F
I1F
k2Z2
(1-k2)Z2
K0Z0
(1-k0)Z0
k1Z1
I1F
(1-k1)Z1
E1A
E1B
I1F
Z2
Z1
Z0
E1A
E1B
Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence
51
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
current I0F at the fault location for a single-phase series fault are given by:
I1F + I2F + I0F =0
(1)
Z2FI2F Z0FI0F = 0
(2)
(3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
Z 2 + Z0
I1F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
Z0
I2F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
Z2
I0F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of negative
to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given by the negative and zero sequence
impedance of the system:
Z0
I2F |I2F|
I1F = |I1F| = Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of the BCD element is shown in Figure 2.1.42 for stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1| BCD
setting
|I1| 0.04In
|I2| 0.01In
0.01In
0
I1
0.04In
Figure 2.1.42
52
&
BCD
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.43 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. The BCD element
outputs trip signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN], [APPL] or PLC signal BCD
BLOCK. The scheme switch [APPL-CT] is available in Model 400 and 420 in which three-phase
or two-phase phase overcurrent protection can be selected. The broken conductor protection is
enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL-CT] is set to 3P in those models.
BCD
172
&
313
BCD TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[BCDEN]
+
TBCD
0
t
"ON"
[APPL-CT
"3P"
1574 BCD_BLOCK
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and
their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
BCD
0.10 1.00
0.01
0.20
I2 / I1
TBCD
0.00 300.00s
0.01s
0.00 s
[BCDEN]
Off / On
Off
BCD Enable
[APPL-CT]
3P / 2P / 1P
3P
Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present in the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay continuously
and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the maximum value of
the last 15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage.
The BCD setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.
TBCD should be set to more than 1 cycle to prevent unwanted operation caused by a transient
operation such as CB closing.
53
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.1.7
Pick-up
Drop-off
Figure 2.1.44
In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original
breaker. To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original
breaker again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the adjacent
breakers following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use retripping
at all, or use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping with trip
command plus overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operate
correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
Scheme logic
BFP initiation is performed on a per-phase basis. Figure 2.1.45 shows the scheme logic for the
BFP. The BFP is started by single phase reclose initiation signals CBF_INIT-A to CBF_INIT-C or
three-phase reclose initiation signal CBF_INIT. (These signals are assigned by the PLC default
setting). These signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present.
The backtripping signal to the adjacent breakers CBF TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
CBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after initiation.
Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with scheme switch [BTC].
There are two kinds of modes for the retrip signal to the original breaker CBF RETRIP, the mode
in which retrip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF, and the direct trip mode in which
retrip is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the
scheme switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], DIR is the direct trip mode, and OC is the
trip mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF.
Figure 2.1.46 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If the
circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and the
BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should include
that of TRTC.
If the CBF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after the setting
time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF is reset by retrip. TBTC does not time-out and the
BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and
54
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.
If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the CBF continues operating and the TBTC
finally picks up. A trip command CBF TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP is
completed.
The BFP protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [BTC] and [RTC] or the PLC signal
CBF BLOCK.
[BTC]
+
A
CBF B
C
"O N"
1 73
CBF_OP-A
&
174
&
322
&
&
323
CBF_OP-C
&
&
324
C BF TRIP
TBTC
319
320
321
CBF_OP-B
175
318
0.00 - 300.00s
314
C BF TRIP-A
C BF TRIP-B
CBF TRIP-C
CBF RETRIP
TRTC
&
&
31 5
316
317
0.00 - 300.00s
&
1663 C BF_IN IT
&
&
&
[RTC]
+
"O C"
"DIR"
[APPL-CT ]
+
1570 CBF_BLOCK
"3P"
&
Figure 2.1.45
55
CBF RETRIP-A
CBF RETRIP-B
CBF RETRIP-C
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Fault
Start CBFP
Trip
Adjacent
breakers Closed
Open
TRIP
Normal trip
Original
breakers Closed
Retrip
Open
Open
Tcb
OCBF
Tcb
Toc
TBF1
Toc
TRTC
CBF
RETRIP
TBF2
TBTC
CBF
TRIP
Figure 2.1.46
Sequence Diagram
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
CBF
0.10 10.0 A
0.05 A
0.50 A
Overcurrent setting
TRTC
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.50 s
TBTC
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
[RTC]
Off / DIR / OC
Off
Retrip control
[BTC]
Off / On
Off
The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of
the rated current.
The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker
(Tcb in Figure 2.1.46) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.1.46). The
timer setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBTC = TCBF1 + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
CBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.
56
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.1.8
|I2f|/|I1f|ICD-2f(%)
&
|I1f|ICDOC
ICD-2f(%)
0
I1f
ICDOC
Figure 2.1.47
A
ICD
B
C
150
151
152
Figure 2.1.48
57
ICD
ICD
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ICD-2f
10 50%
1%
15%
ICDOC
0.10 25.0 A
0.01 A
0.10 A
58
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings Group: Normal
Monitor CB status
CB opens
CB closes
within
T CLE time
STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings Group: Normal
Run T CLE timer
Monitor CB status
T CLE timer
expires
STATE 3
CB closes
STATE 2
CB status: Closed
Settings Group: Cold Load
CB status: Open
Settings Group: Cold Load
Monitor CB status
Figure 2.1.49
I L<ICLDO for
T CLDO time
T CLR timer
expires
CB opens within
CLR time
376
STATE 0
Change to
STATE 1
&
TCLE
377
STATE 1
&
Change to
STATE 2
Change to
STATE 0
0.0 - 10000.0s
&
378
STATE 2
379
STATE 3
&
TCLR
[CLEN]
+
"OFF"
&
1633 CB_N/O_CONT
CONSTANT 1
1634 CB_N/C_CONT
389
177
178
CB_CLOSE
1
1
390
CB_OPEN
TCLDO
176
ICLDO B
0.0 - 10000.0s
Default setting
BI2 COMMAND
Change to
STATE 3
&
&
0.00 - 100.00s
[CLDOEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.1.50
59
[CLPTST] "S0"
+
"S3"
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the cold load protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ICLDO
0.10 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.50 A
TCLE
0-10000 s
1s
100 s
TCLR
0-10000 s
1s
100 s
TCLDO
0.00-100.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
[CLEN]
Off / On
Off
[CLDOEN]
Off / On
Off
Further, relay element settings (OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF4, NOC1, NOC2 and
BCD) are required for the cold load protection (CLP) as follows:
Element
CLP-
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OC1
0.10 25.0 A
0.01 A
2.00 A
OC2
0.10 25.0 A
0.01 A
5.00 A
OC3
0.10 150.0 A
0.01 A
20.0 A
OC4
0.10 150.0 A
0.01 A
40.0 A
EF1
0.05 25.0 A
0.01 A
2.00 A
EF2
0.05 25.0 A
0.01 A
5.00 A
EF3
0.05 100.0 A
0.01 A
20.0 A
EF4
0.05 100.0 A
0.01 A
40.0 A
SE1
0.001 0.25 A
0.001 A
0.020 A
SE2
0.001 0.25 A
0.001 A
0.020 A
SE3
0.001 0.25 A
0.001 A
0.020 A
SE4
0.001 0.25 A
0.001 A
0.020 A
NC1
0.10 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.80 A
NC2
0.10 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.40 A
BCD
0.10 1.00
0.01
0.40
60
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.1.9
P(W)
RP1
Figure 2.1.51
RP Element Characteristic
The active power flow direction can be set positive for either power sending or power receiving by
setting [Power] when the [RP-Power] is set to Enable. When [RP-Power] is set to Disable, the
active power flow direction is the same as the measurement setting.
The RP protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and the scheme switch
[APPLCT] is set to 3P or 2P and [APPLVT] is 3PN.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.52 and 2.1.53 show the scheme logic for the reverse power protection RP1 and RP2.
The active power flow directional control characteristic can be selected to Receive or Send by
scheme switch setting [Power] and [RP-Power] (not shown in Figures 2.1.52 and 2.1.53).
The reverse power elements RP1 and RP2 output RP1 TRIP and RP2 ALARM through delayed
pick-up timers TRP1 and TRP2.
This protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [RP1EN] and [RP2EN] or PLC signals RP1
BLOCK and RP2 BLOCK. Further this protection can block during the timer setting [TCBRP1]
and [TCBRP2] from the CB CLOSE signal being detected.
When the VTFS or CTFS detects a VT failure or a CT failure, it can be set to alarm and block the
RP1 and RP2 protection using scheme switches [VTF-RP1BLK] and [VTF-RP2BLK] or
[CTF-RP1BLK] and [CTF- RP2BLK] respectively.
The scheme switches [APPLCT] and [APPLVT] are available in which three-phase or two-phase
current protection and three-phase voltage protection can be selected. The RP protection is
enabled when three-phase or two-phase current and three-phase voltage are introduced and
[APPLCT] is set to 3P or 2P and [APPLVT] is 3PN.
61
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
RP1
TRP1
590
&
[RP1-2F
+
ICD
591
RP1_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
"Block" &
[RPVBLK]
+
UV
"Block" &
[RP1EN]
+
"ON"
TCBRP1
CB CLOSE
[RPCB]
+
"No use"
0.0 - 60.0s
1612 RP1_BLOCK
&
Non VTF
[VTF-RP1BLK]
+ "OFF"
Non CTF
[CTF-RP1BLK]
+ "OFF"
Figure 2.1.52
RP2
592
&
[RP2-2F
+
ICD
593
RP2_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
"Block" &
[RPVBLK]
+
UV
"Block" &
[RP2EN]
+
"ON"
CB CLOSE
[RPCB]
+
"No use"
TCBRP2
0.0 - 60.0s
1613 RP2_BLOCK
Non VTF
[VTF-RP2BLK]
+ "OFF"
&
Non CTF
[CTF-RP2BLK]
+ "OFF"
Figure 2.1.53
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the RP protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
RP1
1500.0 -5.0 W
0.1W
30.0W
TRP1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.20 s
TCBRP1
0.0 60.0 s
0.1 s
5.0 s
RP1DPR
50 98 %
1%
95 %
RP2
1500.0 -5.0 W
0.1W
30.0W
62
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
TRP2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TCBRP2
0.0 60.0 s
0.1 s
5.0 s
RP2DPR
50 98 %
1%
95 %
RPVBLK
40.0 100.0 s
0.1 V
40.0 V
[RP1EN]
Off / On
Off
RP1 Enable.
[CTF-RP1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[VTF-RP1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[RP2EN]
Off / On
Off
RP2 Enable.
[CTF-RP2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[VTF-RP2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[RPCB]
Use / Nouse
Use
[RP-UVBLK]
Off / On
Off
[RP-Power]
Disable / Enable
Disable
RP-Power disable.
[Power]
Send / Receive
Send
[APPLVT]
Off / 3PN
3PN
[APPLCT]
Off / 3P / 2P / 1P
3P
2.1.10 CT Requirements
2.1.10.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection
Protection class current transformers are normally specified in the form shown below. The CT
transforms primary current within the specified accuracy limit, for primary current up to the
overcurrent factor, when connected to a secondary circuit of the given burden.
5 P 20 : 10VA
Accuracy
Limit (%)
Overcurrent
Factor
Maximum Burden
(at rated current)
Accuracy limit : Typically 5 or 10%. In applications where current grading is to be applied and
small grading steps are desirable, then a 5% CT can assist in achieving the necessary accuracy. In
less onerous applications, a limit of 10% may be acceptable.
Overcurrent factor : The multiple of the CT rating up to which the accuracy limit is claimed,
typically 10 or 20 times. A value of 20 should be specified where maximum fault current is high
and accurate inverse time grading is required. In applications where fault current is relatively low,
or where inverse time grading is not used, then an overcurrent factor of 10 may be adequate.
Maximum burden : The total burden calculated at rated secondary current of all equipment
connected to the CT secondary, including relay input burden, lead burden, and taking the CTs
own secondary resistance into account. GRE140 has an extremely low AC current burden,
typically less than 0.1VA for a 1A phase input, allowing relatively low burden CTs to be applied.
Relay burden does not vary with settings.
If a burden lower than the maximum specified is connected, then the practical overcurrent factor
may be scaled accordingly. For the example given above, at a rated current of 1A, the maximum
value of CT secondary resistance plus secondary circuit resistance (RCT + R2) should be 10. If
63
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a lower value of, say, (RCT + R2) = 5 is applied, then the practical overcurrent factor may be
increased by a factor of two, that is, to 40A.
In summary, the example given of a 5P20 CT of suitable rated burden will meet most applications
of high fault current and tight grading margins. Many less severe applications may be served by
5P10 or 10P10 transformers.
2.1.10.2 Minimum Knee Point Voltage
An alternative method of specifying a CT is to calculate the minimum knee point voltage,
according to the secondary current which will flow during fault conditions:
Vk If (RCT + R2)
where:
Vk = knee point voltage
If = maximum secondary fault current
RCT = resistance of CT secondary winding
R2 = secondary circuit resistance, including lead resistance.
When using this method, it should be noted that it is often not necessary to transform the
maximum fault current accurately. The knee point should be chosen with consideration of the
settings to be applied and the likely effect of any saturation on protection performance. Further,
care should be taken when determining R2, as this is dependent on the method used to connect the
CTs (E.g. residual connection, core balanced CT connection, etc).
2.1.10.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
A core balance CT should be applied, with a minimum knee point calculated as described above.
2.1.10.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
High accuracy CTs should be selected with a knee point voltage Vk chosen according to the
equation:
Vk 2 Vs
where Vs is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
64
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.2
Pickup
Dropoff
Figure 2.2.1
The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have an IDMT characteristic defined by
equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
c
t (G ) TMS
a
V
1
Vs
(1)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.2, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [OVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.
Table 2.2.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves
Curve Description
IDMT
C (User Configurable)
0.000 30.000
by 0.001 step
0.00 5.00
by 0.01 step
0.000 5.000
by 0.001 step
The OV3 and OV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.
65
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop-off/pick-up (DO/PU) ratio.
Overvoltage Inverse Time
Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
1.000
TMS = 1
0.100
1
1.5
2.5
Figure 2.2.2
IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.2.3 to 2.2.6 show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV4.
The OV1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.2.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to DT, and trip signal
OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [OV1EN] to IDMT, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.
The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.2.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.
66
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Figure 2.2.5 and Figure 2.2.6 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection
OV3 and OV4. The OV3 and OV4 elements give trip and alarm signals OV3_TRIP and
OV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3 and TOV4 respectively.
The OV1 to OV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV4EN] or the
PLC signals OV1_BLOCK to OV4_BLOCK respectively.
TOV1
191
A
OV1 B
192
193
194
A
OV1 B
INST
C
&
&
&
&
&
&
195
0.00 - 300.00s
332
333
1
334
OV1-A_TRIP
OV1-B_TRIP
OV1-C_TRIP
196
&
[OV1EN] "DT"
331
OV1_TRIP
1
&
+
"IDMT"
1584 OV1_BLOCK
&
Figure 2.2.3
TOV2
197
A
OV2 B
198
199
512
A
OV2 B
INST
C
&
&
&
&
&
&
513
0.00 - 300.00s
336
337
1
338
OV2-A_TRIP
OV2-B_TRIP
OV2-C_TRIP
514
&
[OV2EN] "DT"
335
OV2_TRIP
1
&
+
"IDMT"
1585 OV2_BLOCK
&
Figure 2.2.4
TOV3
515
OV3 B
515
515
[OV3EN]
+
&
&
432
&
&
433
&
&
434
0.00 - 300.00s
1586 OV3_BLOCK
Figure 2.2.5
67
OV3-A_TRIP
OV3-B_TRIP
OV3-C_TRIP
431
OV3_TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
A
TOV4
518
OV4 B
519
520
[OV4EN]
+
&
436
&
&
437
&
&
438
&
0.00 - 300.00s
1587 OV4_BLOCK
Figure 2.2.6
OV4-A_ALARM
OV4-B_ALARM
OV4-C_ALARM
435
OV4_ALARM
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OV1
10.0 200.0 V
0.1 V
120.0 V
TOV1M
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TOV1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TOV1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OV1DPR
10 98 %
1%
95 %
OV2
10.0 200.0 V
0.1 V
140.0 V
TOV2M
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TOV2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TOV2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OV2DPR
10 98 %
1%
95 %
OV3
10.0 200.0 V
0.1 V
140.0 V
TOV3
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OV3DPR
10 - 98 %
1%
95 %
OV4
10.0 200.0 V
0.1 V
140.0 V
TOV4
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OV4DPR
10 - 98 %
1%
95 %
[OV1EN]
Off/DT/IDMT/C
Off
OV1 Enable
[OV2EN]
Off/DT/IDMT/C
Off
OV2 Enable
[OV3EN]
Off / On
Off
OV3 Enable
[OV4EN]
Off / On
Off
OV4 Enable
68
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.2.2
Figure 2.2.7
The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2)
following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
t (G ) TMS
1 V
Vs
(2)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = undervoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.8, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [UVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.
The UV3 and UV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without
causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising
voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has
travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
69
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
100.000
TMS = 10
10.000
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
1.000
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
Figure 2.2.8
IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.2.9 to 2.2.12 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV4.
The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.2.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to DT, and trip signal
UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [UV1EN] to IDMT, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.
The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.2.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.
Figure 2.2.11 and Figure 2.2.12 show the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage
protection UV3 and UV4. The UV3 and UV4 elements give trip and alarm signals UV3_TRIP and
UV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3 and TUV4 respectively.
The UV1 to UV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV4EN] or the
PLC signals UV1_BLOCK to UV4_BLOCK respectively.
In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages
drop below this setting, then UV1 to UV4 are prevented from operating. This function can be
blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to OFF (not used)
when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to ON (used) when used for load
shedding.
Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.
70
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
A
UV1
202
203
204
UV1 B
INST
C
205
&
&
TUV1
0
&
&
&
&
201
342
343
1
344
0.00 - 300.00s
UV1-A_TRIP
UV1-B_TRIP
UV1-C_TRIP
206
UVBLK
566
UVBLK B
567
568
217
&
&
NON
UVBLK
341
UV1_TRI
P
&
[VBLKEN]
+
"ON"
[UVTST]
+
"OFF"
&
"DT"
[UV1EN]
+
"IDMT"
NON VTF
[VTF UV1-BLK]
+
&
"OFF"
1
1588 UV1_BLOCK
Figure 2.2.9
A
UV2
&
&
TUV2
0
&
&
&
&
207
208
209
522
UV2 B
INST
C
523
NON
UVBLK
524
"DT"
[UV2EN]
347
1
348
0.00 - 300.00s
&
"IDMT"
NON VTF
[VTF UV2-BLK]
+
&
&
&
"OFF"
1589 UV2_BLOCK
Figure 2.2.10
TUV3
526
UV3 B
527
C
[UV3EN]
+
"ON"
&
&
440
&
&
441
&
&
442
0.00 - 300.00s
NON BLK
NON VTF
[VTF_UV3-BLK]
+
525
439
UV3-A_TRIP
UV3-B_TRIP
UV3-C_TRIP
UV3_TRIP
&
"OFF"
1590 UV3_BLOCK
Figure 2.2.11
71
346
345
UV2-A_TRIP
UV2-B_TRIP
UV2-C_TRIP
UV2_TRI
P
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TUV4
528
529
UV4 B
530
C
[UV4EN]
+
"ON"
&
&
444
&
&
445
&
&
446
0.00 - 300.00s
NON BLK
NON VTF
[VTF_UV4-BLK]
+
443
UV4-A_ALARM
UV4-B_ALARM
UV4-C_ALARM
UV4_ALARM
&
"OFF"
1591 UV4_BLOCK
Figure 2.2.12
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
UV1
5.0 130.0 V
0.1 V
60.0 V
TUV1M
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TUV1
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TUV1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
UV2
5.0 130.0 V
0.1 V
40.0 V
TUV2M
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TUV2
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TUV2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
UV3
5.0 130.0 V
0.1 V
40.0 V
TUV3
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
UV4
5.0 130.0 V
0.1 V
40.0 V
TUV4
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
VBLK
5.0 - 20.0 V
0.1 V
10.0 V
[UV1EN]
DT
UV1 Enable
[VTF UV1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[VBLKEN]
Off / On
Off
UV block Enable
[UV2EN]
DT
UV2 Enable
[VTF UV2BLK]
Off / On
Off
[UV3EN]
Off / On
Off
UV3 Enable
[VTF UV3BLK]
Off / On
Off
[UV4EN]
Off / On
Off
UV4 Enable
[VTF UV4BLK]
Off / On
Off
72
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.2.3
GRE140
V0
Figure 2.2.13
A
G
GRE 140
V0
Resistor
Figure 2.2.14
Two independent elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 are provided. These elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC
60255-127:
c
t (G ) TMS
V
1
Vs
73
(3)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),
V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.15, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [ZOVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
These curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.
100.000
10.000
1.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
0.100
TMS = 1
0.010
0
10
15
20
Applied V oltage (x V s)
Figure 2.2.15
74
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN] or PLC signals
ZOV1 BLOCK and ZOV2 BLOCK.
Further, this protection can be blocked when a VT failure (VTF) is detected.
TZOV1
211
ZOV1
&
&
212
ZOV1
INST
351
ZOV1 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[ZOV1EN]
1
&
+
"IDMT"
1592 ZOV1_BLOCK
&
NON VTF
[VTF_ZV1-BLK]
+
"OFF"
Figure 2.2.16
213
ZOV2
&
&
223
ZOV2
INST
352
ZOV2_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[ZOV2EN]
"DT"
1
&
+
"IDMT"
1593 ZOV2_BLOCK
&
NON VTF
[VTF_ZV2-BLK]
+
"OFF"
Figure 2.2.17
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ZOV1
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
20.0 V
TZOV1P
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TZOV1D
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TZOV1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
ZOV2
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
40.0 V
TZOV2P
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TZOV2D
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TZOV2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
[ZOV1EN]
DT
ZOV1 Enable
[VTF ZV1BLK]
Off / On
Off
[ZOV2EN]
Off / On
Off
ZOV2 Enable
[VTF ZV2BLK]
Off / On
Off
75
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.2.4
c
t (G ) TMS
V
1
Vs
(4)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),
V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.2.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.2.18, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [NOVEN] to C and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
These curves are defined in Table 2.2.1.
76
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
NOV Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
1.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
0.100
TMS = 1
0.010
0
10
15
20
Figure 2.2.18
77
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TNOV1
214
NOV1
&
&
353
215
NOV1
INST
NOV1 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[NOV1EN]
"DT"
1
&
+
"IDMT"
1596 NOV1_BLOCK
NON VTF
[VTF_NV1-BLK]
+
&
"OFF"
Figure 2.2.19
216
NOV2
&
&
224
NOV2
INST
354
NOV2_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[NOV2EN]
"DT"
1
&
+
"IDMT"
1597 NOV2_BLOCK
NON VTF
[VTF_NV2-BLK]
+
&
"OFF"
Figure 2.2.20
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
The delay time setting TNOV1 and TNOV2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring
elements NOV1 and NOV2. The minimum operating time of the NOV elements is around 200ms.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
NOV1
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
20.0 V
TNOV1P
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TNOV1D
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TNOV1R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
NOV2
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
40.0 V
TNOV2P
0.05 100.00
0.01
1.00
TNOV2D
0.00 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
TNOV2R
0.0 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
[NOV1EN]
Off
NOV1 Enable
[NOV2EN]
Off / On
Off
NOV2 Enable
78
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.3
Frequency Protection
Providing four-stage frequency protection, GRE140 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring
elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency,
overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.
Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between power generation
capability and loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load
shedding.
Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible
damage due to overfrequency conditions.
Frequency rate of change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly
when the frequency change is very rapid.
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.
2.3.1
Frequency element
Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting
value.
Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises above the setting
value.
These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5
ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive
times.
The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element
(FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.
Figure 2.3.1 shows the characteristics for the UF and OF elements.
Hz
OF
OF setting
UF setting
UF
0
FVBLK setting
Figure 2.3.1
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.3.2 shows the scheme logic for the frequency protection in stage 1. The frequency
element FRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the system voltage is higher
than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1). The FRQ1 element is
programmable for underfrequency or overfrequency operation by the scheme switch [FRQ1EN].
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [FRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal FRQ1
BLOCK.
The stage 2 (FRQ2) to stage 4 (FRQ4) use the same logic as that for FRQ1
79
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TFRQ1
FRQ1
218
OF
&
&
&
FRQ2
&
&
&
&
FRQ4
&
359
&
FRQ4_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
UF
FRQ3_TRIP
TFRQ4
221
&
358
0.00 - 300.00s
&
OF
&
UF
FRQ2_TRIP
TFRQ3
220
OF
357
0.00 - 300.00s
&
FRQ3
&
UF
FRQ1_TRIP
TFRQ2
219
OF
356
0.00 - 300.00s
UF
&
&
FRQBLK
[FRQ1EN]
+
[FRQ2EN]
+
[FRQ3EN]
+
[FRQ4EN]
+
222
NON FRQBLK
"OF"
"UF"
"OF"
"UF"
"OF"
"UF"
"OF"
"UF"
1600 FRQ1_BLOCK
1601 FRQ2_BLOCK
1602 FRQ3_BLOCK
1603 FRQ4_BLOCK
Figure 2.3.2
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
FRQ1
TFRQ1
FRQ2
TFRQ2
FRQ3
TFRQ3
FRQ4
TFRQ4
FVBLK
FRQ1EN
FRQ2EN
FRQ3EN
FRQ4EN
Range
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
-10.00 +10.00 Hz
0.00 300.00 s
40.0 100.0 V
Off / OF / UF
Off / OF / UF
Off / OF / UF
Off / OF / UF
Step
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.1 V
Default
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
-1.00 Hz
1.00 s
40.0 V
Off
Off
Off
Off
80
Remarks
FRQ1 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ1
FRQ2 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ2
FRQ3 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ3
FRQ4 frequency element setting
Timer setting of FRQ4
UV block setting
FRQ1 Enable
FRQ2 Enable
FRQ3 Enable
FRQ4 Enable
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.3.2
Hz
f
t
sec
Figure 2.3.3
Scheme Logic
The stage 2 (FRQ2) to stage 4 (FRQ4) use the same logic as that for FRQ1.
Figure 2.3.4 shows the scheme logic of the frequency rate-of-change protection in stage 1. The
frequency rate-of-change element DFRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the
system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1).
The DFRQ1 element is programmable for frequency decay rate or frequency rise rate operation by
the scheme switch [DFRQ1EN].
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [DFRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal DFRQ1
BLOCK.
The stage 2 (DFRQ2) to stage 4 (DFRQ4) are the same logic of DFRQ1.
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
DFRQ1
DFRQ2
DFRQ3
DFRQ4
FVBLK
DFRQ1EN
DFRQ2EN
DFRQ3EN
DFRQ4EN
Range
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
0.1 15.0 Hz/s
40.0 100.0 V
Off / R / D
Off / R / D
Off / R / D
Off / R / D
Step
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
0.1 V
Default
0.5 Hz/s
0.5 Hz/s
0.5 Hz/s
0.5 Hz/s
40.0 V
Off
Off
Off
Off
81
Remarks
DFRQ1 element setting
DFRQ2 element setting
DFRQ3 element setting
DFRQ4 element setting
UV block setting
DFRQ1 Enable
DFRQ2 Enable
DFRQ3 Enable
DFRQ4 Enable
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
DFRQ 1
225
OF
&
360
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
D FRQ 1_TRIP
UF
&
DFRQ 2
226
OF
&
361
D FRQ 2_TRIP
UF
&
DFRQ 3
227
OF
&
362
D FRQ 3_TRIP
UF
DFR Q4
&
363
228
OF
&
D FRQ 4_TRIP
UF
&
FRQ BLK
[DFRQ 1EN ]
+
[DFRQ 2EN ]
+
[DFRQ 3EN ]
+
[DFRQ4EN]
+
222
N ON FRQ BLK
"R"
"D"
"R"
"D"
"R"
"D"
"R"
"D"
Figure 2.3.4
2.3.3
Trip Circuit
The trip circuit of the frequency protection is configured with the combination of FRQ trip and
DFRQ trip. The trip circuit is configured by the PLC function as shown in Figure 2.3.5.
FRQ1 TRIP
1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP
DFRQ1 TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP
DFRQ2 TRIP
FRQ3 TRIP
DFRQ3 TRIP
FRQ4 TRIP
DFRQ4 TRIP
1681 FRQ_S2_TRIP
1682 FRQ_S3_TRIP
1683 FRQ_S4_TRIP
By PLC
82
355
FRQ_TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.4
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP
EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
SEF2 TRIP
SEF3 TRIP
NOC1 TRIP
UC1 TRIP
THM TRIP
BCD TRIP
OV1 TRIP
OV2 TRIP
OV3 TRIP
UV1 TRIP
UV2 TRIP
UV3 TRIP
ZOV1 TRIP
NOV1 TRIP
RP1 TRIP
83
371
GEN_TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
OC1-A TRIP
OC2-A TRIP
1
1
OC3-A TRIP
372
GEN_TRIP-A
UC1-A TRIP
OV1-A TRIP
OV2-A TRIP
OV3-A TRIP
UV1-A TRIP
UV2-A TRIP
UV3-A TRIP
OC1-B TRIP
OC2-B TRIP
1
1
OC3-B TRIP
373
GEN_TRIP-B
UC1-B TRIP
OV1-B TRIP
OV2-B TRIP
OV3-B TRIP
UV1-B TRIP
UV2-B TRIP
UV3-B TRIP
OC1-C TRIP
OC2-C TRIP
1
1
OC3-C TRIP
374
GEN_TRIP-C
UC1-C TRIP
OV1-C TRIP
OV2-C TRIP
OV3-C TRIP
UV1-C TRIP
UV2-C TRIP
UV3-C TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP
EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1_TRIP
SEF2_TRIP
375
SEF3_TRIP
ZOV1_TRIP
84
GEN. TRIP-N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
O C4 ALARM
EF 4 ALARM
38 0
SEF 4 ALARM
GEN_ALARM
NO C2 ALARM
UC2 ALARM
T HM ALARM
O V4 ALARM
UV2 ALARM
Z OV2 ALARM
NO V2 ALARM
RP2 ALARM
O C4- A ALARM
UC2-A ALARM
381
GE N_ALARM-A
O V4-A ALARM
UV4-A ALARM
O C4- B ALARM
UC2-B ALARM
38 2
G EN_ALARM-B
O V4-B ALARM
UV4-B ALARM
O C4- C ALARM
UC2-C ALARM
383
GE N_ALARM-C
O V4-C ALARM
UV4-C ALARM
EF 4 ALARM
SEF 4 ALARM
384
Z OV2 ALARM
85
G EN_ALARM- N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.5
Autoreclose
The GRE140 provides a multi-shot (five shots) autoreclosing scheme applied for one-circuit
breaker:
Three phase autoreclosing scheme for all shots
Integrated synchronism check function for autoreclosing
Autoreclosing counter
Autoreclosing (ARC) can be initialized by OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1-S1 to SEF4 trip
signals or external trip signals via PLC signals EXT_, as determined by scheme switches
[-INIT]. Trip signals are selected to be used or not used for ARC, by setting [-INIT] to
On or NA respectively. If a trip signal is used to block ARC, then [-INIT] is set to
BLK. ARC can also be blocked by the PLC signal ARC_BLOCK.
Three-phase autoreclosing is provided for all shots, regardless of whether the fault is single-phase
or multi-phase. Autoreclosing can be programmed to provide any number of shots, from one to
five. In each case, if the first shot fails, then all subsequent shots apply three-phase tripping and
reclosing.
To disable autoreclosing, scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "Off".
The GRE140 also provides a manual close function. The manual close can be performed by setting
the PLC signal MANUAL_CLOSE.
2.5.1
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.5.1 shows the simplified scheme logic for the autoreclose. Autoreclose becomes ready
when the circuit breaker is closed and ready for autoreclose (CB READY=1), the on-delay timer
TRDY is picked up, and the [ARCEN] is set to "ON". TRDY is used to determine the reclaim time.
If the autoreclose is ready, then reclosing can be activated by the PLC signal ARC_INIT,
EXT_TRIP-A, EXT_TRIP-B, EXT_TRIP-C or EXT_TRIP, etc.
Auto-reclose conditions, such as voltage and synchronism check VCHK, etc., can be assigned by
PLC signals ARC-S_COND.
Once autoreclose is activated, it is maintained by a flip-flop circuit until one reclosing cycle is
completed.
Autoreclose success (ARC SUCCESS) or fail (ARC FAIL) can be displayed as an event record
message using the event record setting.
Multi-shot autoreclose
Regardless of the tripping mode, three-phase reclosing is performed. If the [ARCEN] is set to
"On", the dead time counter TD1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has
elapsed, reclosing command ARC-SHOT is initiated.
Multi-shot autoreclose can be executed up to four times after the first-shot autoreclose fails. The
multi-shot mode, one to five shots, is set with the scheme switch [ARC-NUM].
During multi-shot reclosing, the dead time counter TD2 for the second shot is activated if the first
shot autoreclose is performed, but tripping occurs again. Second shot autoreclose is performed
after the period of time set on TD2 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 =
1, SP2 = 0, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
Autoreclose is completed at this step if the two shots mode is selected for the multi-shot mode. In
this case, tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
86
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
If three shot mode is selected for the multi-shot mode, autoreclose is further retried after the above
tripping occurs. At this time, the TD3 is started. The third shot autoreclose is performed after the
period of time set on the TD3 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 = 0,
SP2 = 1, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
The three shot mode of autoreclose is then completed, and tripping following a
"reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
When four or five shot autoreclose is selected, autoreclose is further retried once again for tripping
that occurs after "reclose-onto-a-fault". This functions in the same manner as the three shot
autoreclose.
If a fault occurs under the following conditions, the final trip is performed and autoreclose is
blocked.
Reclosing block signal is applied.
During the reclaim time
Auto-reclose condition by PLC signals ARC-S_COND is not completed.
In the OC, EF and SE protections, each tripping is selected by setting [OC-TP], [EF-TP]
or [SE-TP] to any one of Inst(instantaneous trip), Set(delayed trip by T and [M]
setting) or Off(blocked). (See Section 2.3.)
PLC default setting
BI3 COMMAND
401
TRDY
t
0
1605 ARC_READY
&
&
0.0-600.0s
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
TP1
S
F/F
R
VCHK
402
ARC IN-PROG
&
ARC-S1
ARC-SHOT1
S
F/F
R
1648 ARC-S1_COND
TD1
t
0
0.01-300.00s
TR1
t
0
EXT TRIP
404
&
Coordination
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
Autoreclose initiation
&
ARC-S2
ARC-SHOT2
VCHK
S
F/F
R
TD2
t
0
0.01-300.00s
405
&
ARC-SHOT1
1649 ARC-S2_COND
TR2
t
0
ARC-SHOT2
ARC-SHOT3 1
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
&
ARC-S3
ARC-SHOT3
VCHK
STEP COUNTER
SHOT NUM1
SP0
ARC-S1
CLK SP1
SHOT NUM2
1
ARC-S2
SHOT NUM3
SP2
ARC-S3
SHOT NUM4
SP3
ARC-S4
SHOT NUM5
SP4
ARC-S5
SHOT NUM6
SP5
S
F/F
R
1650 ARC-S3_COND
TD3
t
0
0.01-300.00s
TR3
t
0
ARC-SHOT4
TW
1
403
ARC-SHOT
0.01-10.00s
406 ARC-SHOT5
&
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
&
ARC-S4
ARC-SHOT1
1
ARC-SUCCESS
VCHK
ARC FAIL
S
F/F
R
1651 ARC-S4_COND
TD4
t
0
0.01-300.00s
TR4
t
0
ARC-FT
407
&
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
Reset
TRSET
t
0
CB CLOSE
TARCP
t
0
&
0.01-300.00s
&
ARC-S5
ARC-SHOT5
&
VCHK
S
F/F
R
1652 ARC-S5_COND
0.1-600.0s
TRCOV
0
t
TD5
t
0
0.01-300.00s
TR5
t
0
408
&
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
0.1-600.0s
&
1607 MANUAL_CLOSE
Autoreclose initiation
PLC signal input ARC-READY(CB& 63condition: default setting) is alive and Reclaim time
TRDY has elapsed and Scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "On," then autoreclose initiation is
87
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
ready. The reclaim time is selected by setting [TRDY] to 0.0-600.0s.
Autoreclose initiation can consist of the following trips. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or
not is selected by setting [-INIT].
- OC1 to OC4 trip
- EF1 to EF4 trip
- SEF1 to SEF4 trip
Setting [-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
EXT_TRIP-(External autoreclose initiation) or ARC_INIT is autoreclose initiation by PLC
signal input. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or not is selected by setting [EXT-INIT].
Setting [EXT-INIT] = NA / On / Block
PLC default setting
BI3 COMMAND
1605 ARC_READY
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
1628 EXT_TRIP-A
1629 EXT_TRIP-B
1630 EXT_TRIP-C
TRDY
t
0
0.0-600.0s
401
&
&
&
&
&
1631 EXT_TRIP
&
ARC initiation
TP1
1 cycle
-INIT = ON
1606 ARC_INIT
1608 ARC_NO_ACT
RS-ARCBLK
400
&
ARC_BLK_OR
&
[EXT-INIT]
+
BI4 COMMAND
1604 ARC_BLOCK
ON
BLK
&
-INIT = BLK
88
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
&
TD1
t
0
F/F
ARCS1
0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT1
&
&
VCHK
ARC-SHOT5
ARC-SHOT2
VCHK
TD3
t
0
F/F
S3
1649 ARC-S2_COND
&
0.01-300.00s
TD4
t
0
ARC-SHOT3
&
1650 ARC-S3_COND
VCHK
&
F/F
0.01-300.00s
S4
ARC-SHOT
0.01-10.00s
0.01-300.00s
&
ARC-SHOT4
TW
1
&
F/F
S2
ARC-SHOT2 1
ARC-SHOT3
1648 ARC-S1_COND
TD2
t
0
ARC-SHOT1
ARC-SHOT4
1651 ARC-S4_COND
VCHK
TD5
&
&
F/F
0.01-300.00s
S5
VCHK
ARC-SHOT5
1652 ARC-S5_COND
89
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
RS-ARCBLK
&
CB CLOSE
TRSET
t
0
&
ARC_RESET
0.01-300.00s
ARC_IN-PROG
TRCOV
0
t
ARC_SHOT
&
0.1-600.0s
1579 MANUAL_CLOSE
2.5.2
live
live
dead
dead
live
dead
live
dead
The synchronism check is performed for voltage mode 1 while the voltage check is performed for
voltage modes 2 and 3.
Mode 4 is used for manual closing.
90
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
[VCHK]
"OFF"
"LD"
"DL"
"DD"
OVB
&
UVB
536
OVL
533
SYN
532
414
VCHK_LBDL
&
1
415
VCHK_DBLL
&
416
VCHK_DBDL
&
0.01 - 10.00S
TDBDL
&
535
0.01 - 10.00S
TDBLL
&
UVL
"S "
TLBDL
534
412
VCHK
0.01 - 10.00S
TSYN
t
413
VCHK_SYN
0.01 10.00S
Figure 2.5.6 shows the energising control scheme. The voltage and synchronism check output
signal VCHK is generated when the following conditions have been established;
Synchronism check element SYN operates and on-delay timer TSYN is picked up.
Busbar overvoltage detector OVB and line undervoltage detector UVL operate, and
on-delay timer TLBDL is picked up. (This detects live bus and dead line condition.)
Busbar undervoltage detector UVB and line overvoltage detector OVL operate, and
on-delay timer TDBLL is picked up. (This detects dead bus and live line condition.)
Using the scheme switch [VCHK], the energising direction can be selected.
Setting of [VCHK]
Energising control
LD
Reclosed under "live bus and dead line" condition or with synchronism check
DL
Reclosed under "dead bus and live line" condition or with synchronism check
DD
OFF
When [VCHK] is set to "LD", the line is energised in the direction from the busbar to line under
"live bus and dead line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to "DL", the line is energised in the
direction from the line to busbar under "dead bus and live line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to
"DD", the line is under "dead bus and dead line" condition.
When a synchronism check output exists, autoreclose is executed regardless of the scheme switch
position.
When [VCHK] is set to "S", a three-phase autoreclose is performed with synchronism check only.
When [VCHK] is set to "OFF", three-phase autoreclose is performed without voltage and
synchronism check.
The voltage and synchronism check feature requires a single-phase voltage from the busbar and
91
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
the line with Vs input.
Additionally, it is not necessary to fix the phase of the reference voltage "Vs".
To match the busbar voltage and line voltage for the voltage and synchronism check option
mentioned above, the GRE140 has the following three switches and VT ratio settings as shown in
Figure 2.5.7.
[VTPHSEL]: This switch is used to match the voltage phases. If the A-phase voltage or
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used as a reference voltage, "A" is selected.
[VT-RATE]: This switch is used to match the magnitude and phase angle. "PH-G" is
selected when the reference voltage is a single-phase voltage while "PH-PH" is
selected when it is a phase-to-phase voltage.
[3PH-VT]:
"Bus"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Busbar voltage (VB).
- The reference voltage (Vs) is Line voltage(VL).
"Line"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Line voltage (VL).
- The reference voltage (Vs) is Busbar voltage(VB).
Three phase
voltages
Reference
voltage
Va
Vb
Voltage check
&
Synchronism check
Vc
Vs
[VTPHSEL]
+
+
+
"A"
"B"
"C"
[VT - RATE]
+
+
"PH-PH"
"PH-G"
[3PH - VT]
+
+
"Bus"
"Line"
92
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
VLLine voltage
(Incoming voltage)
Dead bus and
live line
OVL
A, C, D: Voltage check
B: Synchronism check
Dead bus and
dead line
UVL
C
0V
D
UVB
VB Busbar voltage
(Runningvoltage)
OVB
The synchronism check element SYN is composed of the following check functions:
-
SYN(SYN): checks the phase angle difference between the line voltage (incoming
voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)
SYNV(SYNDV): checks the voltage difference between the line voltage (incoming
voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)
SYNf(SYNDf): checks the frequency difference between the line voltage (incoming
voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)
The SYN is configured using these detectors as shown in Figure 2.5.9. The SYNf can be disabled
by the scheme switch [DfEN].
SYN
&
SYNUV/OV
&
SYN
OUTPUT
SYNV
SYNf
+ "Off"
[DfEN]
"On"
Figure 2.5.10 shows the characteristics of the synchronism check element used for the autoreclose
if the line and busbar are live.
The synchronism check element operates if both the voltage difference and phase angle difference
are within their setting values.
93
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
S = SYN setting
VL
s
VB
SYNOV
SYNUV
For the element SYN, the voltage difference is checked by the following equations.
SYNOV VB SYNUV
SYNOV VL SYNUV
V = |VL VB| Vs
where,
Vs = Voltage difference setting
VB = busbar voltage
VL = line voltage
SYNOV = lower voltage setting
SYNUV = upper voltage setting
V = Voltage difference
The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.
f = |fVL1 fVB| fs
where,
fVB = frequency of VB
fVL = frequency of VL
f = frequency difference
fs= frequency difference setting
The phase difference is checked by the following equations.
VB VL cos 0
VB VL sin (SYNS) VB VL sin
where,
= phase difference between VB and VL
SYNs = phase difference setting
Note:
The relay can directly detect a slip cycle (frequency difference f) if f is not used.
When the phase difference setting SYNs and the synchronism check time setting
TSYN are given a detected maximum slip cycle is determined using the following
equation:
f=
SYNss
where,180TSYN
94
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
f = slip cycle
SYNs = phase difference setting (degree)
TSYN = setting of synchronism check timer TSYN (second)
2.5.3
Sequence Coordination
When two or more relays protect the same feeder their sequences (trip shot number) must be
coordinated. Considering the diagram as shown in Figure 2.5.11, relays A and B protect the same
feeder and both are programmed for 2 instantaneous and 2 IDMT trips. Both relays A and B see
the permanent fault at Fault F, and relays operate with instantaneous protection for 1st trip (at
SHOT NUM1) and 2nd trip (at SHOT NUM2).
3rd trip (at SHOT NUM3) is delayed, and the relays have different IDMT settings, so that relay B
only operates. Relay A does not trip and autoreclose, and judges that the autoreclose was
successful. It reclaims and returns to the beginning of its autoreclose cycle (= SHOT NUM1).
However, relay B will attempt the delayed 4th trip (at SHOT NUM4), and then an unwanted
mal-instantaneous trip will be issued by relay A. In this case, the sequence co-ordination function
is applied and the trip shot number is coordinated as shown in Figure 2.5.12. The trip shot number
is coordinated by the operation of OC, EF or SEF element. The sensitivity (OC, EF or SEF) and
the scheme switch ([COORD-OC], [COORD-EF] or [COORD-SE]) are set (See Section 2.5.4).
A
A:GRE140
B:GRE140
Figure 2.5.11
Fault F
Relay Location
Co-ordination disabled:
1st trip 2nd trip
(Inst)
(Inst)
Relay A
No trip
Relay B
Co-ordination enabled:
No trip
No trip
Relay A
4th trip
(IDMT)
Relay B
Figure 2.5.12
95
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
2.5.4
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the autoreclose function and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
ARC
TRDY
TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
TD5
TR5
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
OVB
UVB
OVL
UVL
SYNUV
SYNOV
SYNDV
SYN
SYNDf
TSYN
TLBDL
TDBLL
TDBDL
[ARCEN]
[ARC-NUM]
[VCHK]
[DfEN]
[VTPHSEL]
[VT-RATE]
[3PH-VT]
[OC1-INIT]
[OC1-TP1]
[OC1-TP2]
[OC1-TP3]
[OC1-TP4]
[OC1-TP5]
[OC1-TP6]
[OC2-INIT]
[OC2-TP1]
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
0.0 600.0 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 300.00 s
0.01 310.00 s
0.01 10.00 s
0.1 600.0 s
0.1 600.0 s
0.1 600.0 s
0.01 300.00 s
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
10 - 150 V
0 - 150 V
5 - 75
0.01 2.00 Hz
0.01 - 10.00 s
0.01 - 10.00 s
0.01 - 10.00 s
0.01 - 10.00 s
Off/On
S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
Off/LD/DL/DD/S
Off/On
A/B/C
PH-G / PH-PH
Bus / Line
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
0.1 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.01 s
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1
0.01 Hz
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
60.0 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
2.00 s
3.0 s
10.0 s
10.0 s
3.00 s
51 V
13 V
51 V
13 V
83 V
51 V
150 V
30
1.00 Hz
1.00 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
On
S1
Off
Off
A
PH-G
Line
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
Reclaim time
1st shot dead time
1st shot reset time
2nd shot dead time
2nd shot reset time
3rd shot dead time
3rd shot reset time
4th shot dead time
4th shot reset time
5th shot dead time
5th shot reset time
Output pulse time
Autoreclose succeed judgement time
Autoreclose recovery time after final trip
Autoreclose pause time after manually closing
Autoreclose reset time
Live bus check
Dead bus check
Live line check
Dead line check
UV element of synchronism check
OV element of synchronism check
Voltage difference for SYN
Synchronism check (phase angle difference)
Frequency difference check for SYN
Synchronism check time (Live-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check time (Live-bus & Dead-line)
Voltage check time (dead-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check time (Dead-bus & Dead-line)
Autoreclose enable
Autoreclosing shot number
Autoreclosing voltage check
Frequency difference checking enable
VT phase selection
VT rating
3-phase VT location
Autoreclose initiation by OC1
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
OC1 trip mode of 5th trip
OC1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC2
OC2 trip mode of 1st trip
96
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
[OC2-TP2]
[OC2-TP3]
[OC2-TP4]
[OC2-TP5]
[OC2-TP6]
[OC3-INIT]
[OC3-TP1]
[OC3-TP2]
[OC3-TP3]
[OC3-TP4]
[OC3-TP5]
[OC3-TP6]
[OC4-INIT]
[OC4-TP1]
[OC4-TP2]
[OC4-TP3]
[OC4-TP4]
[OC4-TP5]
[OC4-TP6]
[EF1-INIT]
[EF1-TP1]
[EF1-TP2]
[EF1-TP3]
[EF1-TP4]
[EF1-TP5]
[EF1-TP6]
[EF2-INIT]
[EF2-TP1]
[EF2-TP2]
[EF2-TP3]
[EF2-TP4]
[EF2-TP5]
[EF2-TP6]
[EF3-INIT]
[EF3-TP1]
[EF3-TP2]
[EF3-TP3]
[EF3-TP4]
[EF3-TP5]
[EF3-TP6]
[EF4-INIT]
[EF4-TP1]
[EF4-TP2]
[EF4-TP3]
[EF4-TP4]
[EF4-TP5]
[EF4-TP6]
[SE1-INIT]
[SE1-TP1]
[SE1-TP2]
[SE1-TP3]
Range
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
Step
Default
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
97
Remarks
OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC3
OC3 trip mode of 1st trip
OC3 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC3 trip mode of 4th trip
OC3 trip mode of 5th trip
OC3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC4
OC4 trip mode of 1st trip
OC4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF1
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
EF1 trip mode of 5th trip
EF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF2
EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
EF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF2 trip mode of 4th trip
EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF3
EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF3 trip mode of 4th trip
EF3 trip mode of 5th trip
EF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF4
EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
EF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF4 trip mode of 4th trip
EF4 trip mode of 5th trip
EF4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE1
SE1 trip mode of 1st trip
SE1 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE1 trip mode of 3rd trip
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
[SE1-TP4]
[SE1-TP5]
[SE1-TP6]
[SE2-INIT]
[SE2-TP1]
[SE2-TP2]
[SE2-TP3]
[SE2-TP4]
[SE2-TP5]
[SE2-TP6]
[SE3-INIT]
[SE3-TP1]
[SE3-TP2]
[SE3-TP3]
[SE3-TP4]
[SE3-TP5]
[SE3-TP6]
[SE4-INIT]
[SE4-TP1]
[SE4-TP2]
[SE4-TP3]
[SE4-TP4]
[SE4-TP5]
[SE4-TP6]
[EXT-INIT]
[COORD-OC]
[COORD-EF]
[COORD-SE]
OC-CO
EF-CO
SEF-CO
Range
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
Off/On
Off/On
Off/On
0.1 150.0 A
0.05 150.0 A
0.001 0.25 A
Step
0.01 A
0.01 A
0.01 A
Default
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
Off
Off
Off
1.00 A
0.30 A
0.050 A
Remarks
SE1 trip mode of 4th trip
SE1 trip mode of 5th trip
SE1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE2
SE2 trip mode of 1st trip
SE2 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE2 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE2 trip mode of 4th trip
SE2 trip mode of 5th trip
SE2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE3
SE3 trip mode of 1st trip
SE3 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE3 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE3 trip mode of 4th trip
SE3 trip mode of 5th trip
SE3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE4
SE4 trip mode of 1st trip
SE4 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE4 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE4 trip mode of 4th trip
SE4 trip mode of 5th trip
SE4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by external trip command
OC-CO relay for Co-ordination
EF-CO relay for Co-ordination
SEF-CO relay for Co-ordination
OC-CO for co-ordination
EF-CO for co-ordination
SEF-CO for co-ordination
To determine the dead time, it is essential to find an optimal value while taking factors such as
de-ionization time and power system stability into consideration which normally contradict one
another.
Normally, a longer de-ionization time is required for a higher line voltages or larger fault currents.
For three-phase autoreclose, the dead time is generally 15 to 30 cycles.
98
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3. Technical Description
3.1
Hardware Description
3.1.1
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in Test
menu.
TRIP
Red
ALARM
Yellow
Relay Fail
Red
CB CLOSED
Red/Green/
Yellow
CB OPEN
Green
LOCAL
Yellow
REMOTE
Yellow
(LED1)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED2)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED3)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED4)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED5)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED6)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed
for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can
be changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow) , the individual status of which can be
viewed on the LCD screen as Virtual LEDs. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For the
operation, see Section 4.2.1.
99
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
The TRIP LED and an operated LED, if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user,
either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
Remote Reset operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, whether or not the TRIP
LED is lit is controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] by the output of an alarm element such
as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, etc..
The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can
be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .
The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit,
the CB can be controlled using the and keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LED
is lit, the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. When
neither of these LEDs are lit , the CB control function is disabled.
The VIEW key, same as key, starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The
VIEW key will scroll the screen through Virtual LED Metering Indication and
back-light off when the LCD is in the Digest screen mode.
The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.
The END key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in the
MAIN MENU.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input
settings or change settings.
The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local
personal computer.
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Liquid crystal
display
Control keys
Operation keys
USB connector
(type B)
REMOTE
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.2
AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE140 model and their respective
input terminal numbers. Model 40 and 42 depend upon their scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
[APPLCT] setting
Term. No.
TB4
1-2
TB4
3-4
TB4
5-6
TB4
7-8
VT setting
3P
2P
1P
[APPLVT]=3PN
setting
[APPLVE]=
On setting
[APPLVS]=
On setting
A phase
current Ia
A phase
current Ia
---
---
---
---
B phase
current Ib
C phase
current Ic
---
---
---
---
C phase
current Ic
Residual
current Ie
Residual current
Ie
---
---
---
---
---
---
Zero sequence
Residual
current Ise(*1)
current Ie
or
Zero sequence
current Ise(*1)
TB2
1-2
TB2
3-4
TB2
5-6
TB2
7-8
Zero sequence
current Ise(*1)
---
---
---
A phase voltage
Va
---
---
---
---
B phase voltage
Vb
---
---
---
---
C phase voltage
Vc
---
---
---
---
---
Residual
voltage Ve
Reference
voltage Vs for
synchronism
check
TB4
9-10
(*1):
3.2.2
Ise required for SEF elements. In model 42 and [APPLCT]=3P, the residual current is
calculated by Ia , Ib and Ic.
101
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
model is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and
BI2, and to 110V or 220V for the other BIs. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection
nominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for the other
BIs.
The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at
77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In case of 24V and 48V
supplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured
for operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to
Enable. In case TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3), then the
binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc
supply voltage.
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
Element
Contents
Range
Step
Default
BI1SNS BI(*)SNS
Binary switch
Norm/ Inv
Norm
BITHR1
48 / 110 / 220
110
(12 / 24 / 48 )
(24)
BITHR2
110 (24)
TCSPEN
TCS enable
Off / On / Opt-On
Off
BI1PUD BI(*)PUD
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
BI1DOD BI(*)DOD
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
(*):The number of binary inputs. The model 4*0 has 6 binary inputs,
the model 4*1 has 12 binary inputs, the model 4*2 has 18 binary inputs.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between two settings groups. Change of
active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 and 2641).
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16
characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signal BIs by setting. When
inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD. These alarm
output signals are signal Nos. 2560 to 2563.
102
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
GRE140
(+) ()
BI1
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
BI1
[BI1SNS]
BI1 command
"Norm"
"Inv"
BI2PUD
t
BI2
BI2DOD
0
BI2
BI3
"110V"
"48V"
BI(*)PUD
BI(*)
BI(*)DOD
0
[BI(*)SNS
BI(*) command
"Norm"
[BITHR2]
"110V"
BI2 command
"Inv"
BI(*)
"220V"
[BI2SNS]
"Norm"
[BITHR1]
"220V"
"Inv"
0V
Function selection
The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table
3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For setting,
refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and
LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.
3.2.3
103
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
Ins, for delayed drop-off Dl, for dwell operation Dw or for latching operation Lat by the
scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off Dl or dwell operation Dw can be
set by TBO. When Dw is selected, the BO operates for the TBO set time if the input signal does
not continue longer than the TBO set time. If the duration of the input signal exceeds the TBO set
time, the BO output is continuous for the input signal time.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit
is detected.
Signal List
&
Appendix B
Auxiliary relay
6 GATES
or
1
1
6 GATES
&
TBO
0
&
"Dw"
[RESET]
0.00 10.00s
"Dl"
&
"Lat"
S
F/F
R
Reset button
By PLC
768
1639 IND.RESET
BI1_COMMAND
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
3.2.4
Element
[RESET]
Range
Ins / Dl / Dw /Lat
[Logic]
TBO
OR / AND
0.00 10.00s
Step
0.01s
Default
See Appendix C
See Appendix C
See Appendix C
Remarks
Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
BO gate logic.
BO output timer.
Frequency
GRE140 can be set in accordance with the rated frequency of the system i.e. 50Hz or 60Hz. If the
rated frequency is set incorrectly, it may not operate correctly because GRE140 is the measured
value cannot be detected correctly.
104
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.2.5
105
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.3
Automatic Supervision
3.3.1
3.3.2
Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.
Relay Monitoring
The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring
The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health
of the AC input circuit is verified.
CT circuit current monitoring for [APPLCT] = 3P setting
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) 4 Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 20% of rated current
Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPLVT]= 3PN setting
|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3 6.35 (V)
Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPLVT]= 3PN setting
|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3 6.35 (V)
where, a = Phase shift of 120, a2 = Phase shift of 240
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred
in the AC input circuit. This monitoring can be disabled by scheme switch [CTSVEN].
The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection
of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits. These monitoring functions can be disabled
by scheme switches [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] respectively.
The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the
voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected
with the incorrect phase sequence.
A/D accuracy checking
An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
106
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
converter, and a check is made to ensure that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed
range, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are performed to
verify that memory circuits are healthy:
Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
Setting value monitoring:
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
software is running normally.
DC Supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored, and is checked to see
that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.
3.3.3
CT Failure Supervision
This function is available for [APPL-CT] = 3P setting only.
Figure 3.3.1 shows the scheme logic of the CT failure supervision (CTFS). If the residual
overcurrent element EFF(EFCF) operates and the residual overvoltage element ZOVF(ZOVCF)
does not operate, CT failure (CTF) is detected. When the CTFS detects a CTF, it can alarm and
block various protections as EF, NOC and UC protections etc.
The CTF signal is reset 100 ms after the CT failure condition has reset. When the CTF continues
for 10s or more, Err: CTF is displayed in LCD message.
If the PLC signal CTF_BLOCK is received, this function is blocked. If the PLC signal EXT_CTF
is received, the CT failure (CTF) is output independently of this CTF function.
This function can be enabled or disabled by scheme switch [CTFEN] and has a programmable
reset characteristic. For latching operation, set to ON, and for automatic reset after recovery, set
to OPT-ON.
231
EFCF
&
ZOVCF
232
&
&
&
0.015s
0.1s
1
"OPT-ON"
A.M.F. ON
1616 CTF_BLOCK
1
t
10s
CB CLOSE
CB NON BLK
1
0.2s
1620 EXT_CTF
Figure 3.3.1
CT Failure Supervision
107
385
[CTFEN] "ON"
&
CTF
NON CTF
CTF_ALM
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.3.4
VT Failure Supervision
This function is available for [APPLVT] = 3PN settings.
When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer (VT), the voltage
dependent measuring elements may operate incorrectly. GRE140 incorporates a VT failure
supervision function (VTFS) as a measure against such incorrect operation. When the VTFS
detects a VT failure, it can alarm and block the following voltage dependent protections.
Directional overcurrent protection
Directional earth fault protection
Directional sensitive earth fault protection
Directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection
Undervoltage protection
Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection
Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection
A binary input signal (external VTF) to indicate a miniature circuit breaker trip in the VT circuits
is also available for the VTFS.
Scheme logic
Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic for the VTFS. VT failure is detected by the following two
schemes.
VTF1: The residual overcurrent element EFF(EFVF) does not operate (EFF=0), the residual
overvoltage element ZOVF(ZOVVF) operates (ZOVF=1) and the phase current
change detection element OCDF(OCDVF) does not operate (OCDF=0).
VTF2: The phase undervoltage element UVF(UVVF) operates (UVF=1) when the three
phases of the circuit breaker are closed (CB CLOSE=1) and the phase current change
detection element OCDF(OCDVF) does not operate (OCDF=0).
In order to prevent detection of false VT failures due to unequal pole closing of the circuit breaker,
the VTFS is blocked for 200 ms after line energization.
The VTF signal is reset 100 ms after the VT failure condition has reset. When the VTF continues
for 10s or more, Err: VTF1 or Err: VTF2 is displayed as an LCD message.
If the PLC signal VTF_BLOCK is received, this function is blocked. If the PLC signal EXT_VTF
is received, the VT failure (VTF) is output independently of this VTF function.
VTF1 and VTF2 can be enabled or disabled respectively by the scheme switches [VTF1EN] and
[VTF2EN] and has a programmable reset characteristic. For latching operation, set to ON, and
for automatic reset after recovery, set to OPT-ON.
108
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
t
A
UVF
234
235
A
OCDF B
C
239
VTF1 ALM
10s
236
&
387
&
240
0.1s
S
F/F
R
&
"ON"
"OPT-ON"
0.015s
&
0.1s
&
1
1
1
EFVF
10s
241
&
1
242
&
&
0.015s
&
"ON"
[VTF2EN]
388
&
VTF
NON VTF
VTF2
NON VTF2
0.1s
"OPT-ON"
386
VTF2 ALM
CB CLOSE
ZOVVF
VTF1
NON VTF1
237
238
[VTF1EN]
233
CB NON BLK
A.M.F. ON
1617 VTF_BLOCK
1634 EXT_VTF
Figure 3.3.2
3.3.5
VT Failure Supervision
Trip
output
1632 TC_FAIL
CB CLOSE
[TCSPEN]
CB trip coil
Figure 3.3.3
"OPT-ON"
1
&
&
0.4s
1
"ON"
109
1270
TCSV
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can also be monitored in either the breaker closed or
open condition using two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.4 shows a typical scheme. At CB closed
condition, the monitoring current flows in the photo-coupler BI1. On the other hand, at CB
opened condition, the monitoring current flows in photo-coupler BI1 of BI2 via tripping cable,
circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open and
closed conditions.
If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a Trip
Circuit Fail alarm.
Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the two
BIs selected "TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while CB is
closed. TCS by 2BIs should be applied using BI1 and BI2 for the BI inputs. The TCS with 2BIs
sets the BI threshold voltage ([BITHR1]) to approximately half of the trip supply voltage. If the
trip supply voltage is 110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] sets "48" (or "12").
The resistors on the BI1 and BI2 photo coupler circuits should be added as shown in Figure 3.3.4
below in consideration of the fail-safe of relay failure
Circuit Breaker
GRE140
CB Aux.
Contacts
Trip Output
+ve
Trip
Supply
CB Trip Coil
-ve Trip
Supply
Resistor
Binary Input
(BI2)
Binary Input
(BI1)
Figure 3.3.4 Scheme Logic of Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs
3.3.6
=1
&
5.0s
1634 CB_N/C_CONT
[CBSMEN]
"ON"
110
1271
CBSV
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are assigned to CB_N/O_CONT and
CB_N/C_CONT by PLC.
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Periodic maintenance of a CB is required for checking the trip circuit, the operation mechanism
and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of
fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of the CB:
Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operating mechanism. The trip
counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and
informs the user of the time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting
TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
The counter can be initiated by PLC signals TP_COUNT and TP_COUNT-. The default
setting is the TP_COUNT and is assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.
Sum of the current breaking quantity Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability
of CB. The Iy counter increments the value of current to the power y, recorded at the time of
issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric
withstand capability of the oil generally decreases as a function of I2t, and maintenance such
as oil changes, etc., may be required. I is the fault current interrupted by the CB. t is the
arcing time within the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, y is
normally set to 2 to monitor the square of the interrupted current. For other circuit breaker
types, especially those for HV systems, y may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued
when the count for any phase exceeds a user-defined setting IyALM. This feature is not
available in GRE140-110. The Iy count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the
scheme switch [IyAEN].
The counter can be initiated by PLC signals SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C. The default settings
for the SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C are assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.
Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB
operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if CB operation is slow.
The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the phase
currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase exceeds a
user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified
interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the
scheme switch [OPTAEN].
The CB operating time monitoring feature can be initiated by PLC signals OT_ALARM_A to
OT_ALARM_C. The default settings for OT_ALARM_A to OT_ALARM_C are assigned to
the GEN_TRIP signal.
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturers instructions.
3.3.7
Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event record messages
111
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The AC
input imbalance monitoring alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switches
[CTSVEN], [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] to "OFF". The setting is used to block unnecessary alarms
during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item
LCD
Message
LED
"IN SERVICE"
LED
"ALARM"
LED
"Relay fail"
AC input imbalance
monitoring
Err:CT,
Err:V0,
Err:V2 (1)
On/Off (2)
On
(4)
Err:A/D
Off
On
(4)
Relay fail
Memory monitoring
Err:SUM,
Err:RAM,
Err:BRAM,
Err:EEP
Off
On
(4)
Relay fail
----
Off
On
(4)
----
Err:DC
Off
(3)
Off
Relay fail-A
Err:TC
On
On
Off
CB state monitoring
Err:CB
On
On
Off
CB condition monitoring
Trip count alarm
ALM:TP
COUNT
On
On
Off
TP COUNT ALM,
Relay fail-A
ALM: OP time
On
On
Off
Iy count alarm
ALM:IY
On
On
Off
CT failure supervision
Err:CTF
On
On
Off
VT failure supervision
Err:VTF1,
Err:VTF2
On
On
Off
Watchdog Timer
(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [CTSVEN], [V0SVEN] or [V2SVEN] is set to "ALM"
and off when set to "ALM & BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is
recorded when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates except for DC supply fail condition.
The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is
shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.
3.3.8
Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
A/D accuracy check
Memory monitoring
112
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring function, the scheme switches
[CTSVEN], [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is
blocked and an alarm is output, or if only an alarm is output.
3.3.9
Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.
Element
CTF supervision
EFF
ZOVF
VTF supervision
UVF
OCDF
[CTFEN]
[VTF1EN]
[VTF2EN]
[CTSVEN]
[V0SVEN]
[V2SVEN]
[TCSPEN]
[CBSMEN]
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
0.05 - 20.0 A
5.0 130.0 V
0.01 A
0.1 V
0.20 A
20.0 V
5.0 130.0 V
0.1 A (Fixed)
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/ALM&BLK/ALM
Off/ALM&BLK/ALM
Off/ALM&BLK/ALM
Off/On/OPT-On
Off/On
0.1 V
51.0 V
Off
Off
Off
ALM
ALM
ALM
Off
Off
[TCAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
[IyAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
Iy count alarm
[OPTAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
TCALM
1 - 10000
10000
IyALM
10 10000 E6
E6
10000
YVALUE
1.0 2.0
0.1
2.0
y value setting
OPTALM
100 5000 ms
10 ms
1000 ms
When setting ZOVF and EFF, the maximum detection sensitivity of each element should be set
with a margin of 15 to 20% taking account of variations in the system voltage, the asymmetry of
the primary system and CT and VT error.
113
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.4
Recording Function
The GRE140 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
Counters
These records are displayed on the LCD on the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
3.4.1
Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command from the GRE140 and the following items are
recorded for a fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Fault location
Relevant events
Power system quantities
User configurable initiation
The user can configure four fault record triggers (Signal No.:2624 to 2627) by PLC. Any of the
input signals as shown in Appendix B can be assigned to these fault record trigger signals.
Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have
been stored, the oldest fault record is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence
This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using
the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme such as OC1, EF1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.
Faulted phase
This is the phase to which an operating command is output.
Fault location
The distance to the fault point calculated by the fault locator is recorded.
The distance is expressed in km and as a percentage (%) of the line length.
Relevant events
Such events as autoreclose, re-tripping following the reclose-on-to-a fault or autoreclose are
recorded with time-tags.
Power system quantities
The following power system quantities are recorded in pre-fault and post-fault records.
-
114
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
-
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage (Ve)
Magnitude and phase angle of the reference voltage for synchronism check (Vs)
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current (I1, I2, I0)
Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from residual circuit (Ie)
Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise) for model 420
series
Frequency (f)
The zero sequence current Ie in model 420 is calculated from the three phase input currents and the
calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. Ie in other settings and models is displayed using the current fed
from the CT.
3.4.2
Event Recording
The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. Up to 200
records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 200 records have been stored, the oldest
event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
The user can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event
items can be assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to On
(only recording On transitions) or On/Off(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by
setting. The On/Off mode events are specified by the Bi-trigger events setting. If the
Bi-trigger events is set to 100, No.1 to 100 events are On/Off mode and No.101 to 128
events are On mode.
The name of an event can be set by RSM100. A maximum of 22 characters can be set, but the LCD
displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended that a maximum of 11 characters are set.
The set name can be viewed on the Set.(view) screen.
The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.
The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix G.
3.4.3
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
BITRN
0 - 128
100
EV1 EV128
0 - 3071
Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overcurrent starter element operates or a tripping
command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is started when a start command by the PLC
is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers (Signal No.:2632 to 2635) by
PLC.
The records include a maximum of 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals
and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix C can be
assigned by the binary signal setting for the disturbance record.
115
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording
Model
Model 400
Model 420
APPLCT = 1P
I0
Ie(I0), Ise(I0)
APPLCT = 2P
APPLCT = 3P
Va, Vb, Vc
Va, Vb, Vc
APPL setting
CT
APPLVT = 3PN,
APPLVE = Off
APPLVS = Off
APPLVT = 3PN,
APPLVE = On
APPLVS = On
VT
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can
be set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the total for the pre-fault and post-fault recording time is 5.0s or
less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time
0.1s
0.5s
1.0s
1.50s
2.0s
2.5s
3.0s
50Hz
40
25
15
10
60Hz
40
20
10
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
Time1
0.1-4.9 s
0.1 s
2.0
Time2
0.1-4.9 s
0.1 s
2.0
OC
0.1-150.0 A
0.01 A
2.00 A
Overcurrent detection
EF
0.05-100.0 A
0.01 A
0.60 A
SEF
0.001-1.00A
0.001 A
0.200 A
NOC
0.10-10.0 A
0.01 A
0.40A
OV
10.0-200.0 V
0.1 V
120.0 V
Overvoltage detection
UV
1.0-130.0 V
0.1 V
60.0 V
Undervoltage detection
ZOV
1.0-130.0 V
0.1 V
20.0 V
NOV
1.0-130.0 V
0.1 V
20.0 V
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.
116
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Element
Range
[Trip]
Step
Default
Remarks
OFF/ON
ON
[OC]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by OC operation
[EF]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by EF operation
[SEF]
OFF/ON
ON
[NC]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by NC operation
[OV]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by OV operation
[UV]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by UV operation
[ZOV]
OFF/ON
ON
[NOV]
OFF/ON
ON
117
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.5
Metering Function
The GRE140 measures current and demand values for phase currents, phase and phase-to-phase
voltages, residual current, residual voltage, symmetrical component currents and voltages,
frequency, power factor, active and reactive power, and apparent power. The measurement data
shown below is displayed on the LCD on the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
Current: The following quantities are measured and updated every second.
-
Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from residual circuit (Ie)
Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise) for model 420
series
Magnitude of positive, negative and zero sequence currents (I1, I2, I0)
Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage (Ve)
Magnitude and phase angle of reference voltage for synchronism check (Vs)
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
Demand
- Maximum and minimum of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc: max, min)
-
Maximum and minimum of the system residual voltage (Ve: max, min)
Maximum and minimum of the reference voltage for synchronism check (Vs: max, min)
Maximum of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise: max) for model 420 series
Maximum of negative sequence current (I2: max.)
118
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well.
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7.
In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averaged
over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average values
are shown on the display screen.
The zero sequence current Ie in the model 420 series is calculated from the three phase input
currents and the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is displayed the
from current fed from the CT.
The displayed quantities depend on [APPLCT] and [APPLVT] settings and relay model are as
shown in Table 3.5.1. Input current and voltage greater than 0.01In(rated current) and 0.06V at
the secondary side are required for the measurement.
Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,
where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
The signing of active and reactive power flow direction can be set positive for either power
sending or power receiving. The signing of reactive power can also be set positive for either
lagging phase or leading phase.
Table 3.5.1
Model
APPL
Setting
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ie
Ise
I1
I2
I0
I2/I1
THM
Va
Vb
Vc
Ve
Vab
Vbc
Vca
Vs
V1
V2
V0
f
df
PF
P
Q
S
1P
---
-------
-----
Displayed Quantity
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-APPLVS On/Off
-
-
-
-
-
--
1P
---
------
-----
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-APPLVS On/Off
-
-
-
-
-
--
(Note) : Measured
--: Not measured (The item is indicated, but the quantity value is indicated as 0.)
Blank Space: The item is not indicated.
119
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.6
Fault locator
3.6.1
Application
The fault locator incorporated in the GRE140 measures the distance to fault on the protected line
using local voltages and currents. The measurement result is expressed as a percentage (%) of line
length and distance (km) and is displayed on the LCD on the relay front panel. It is also output to
a local PC or RSM (relay setting and monitoring) system.
To measure the distance to fault, the fault locator requires a minimum of 3 cycles fault duration
time.
In distance to fault calculations, the change in the current before and after the fault has occurred is
used as a reference current, alleviating the influences of load current and arc voltage. As a result,
the location error is a maximum of 2.5 km for faults at a distance of up to 100 km, and a
maximum of 2.5% for faults at a distance between 100 km and 250 km.
The fault locator is available for [APPLCT]= "3P" and [APPLVT]= "3PN" setting.
The fault locator cannot correctly measure the distance to fault during a power swing.
3.6.2
(1)
where,
Vbc = fault voltage between faulted phases = Vb Vc
Ibc = fault current between faulted phases = Ib Ic
I" = change of fault current before and after fault occurrence = (Ib-Ic) (ILb-ILc)
ILb, ILc = load current
R1 = resistance component of line positive sequence impedance
X1 = reactance component of line positive sequence impedance
Kbc = impedance imbalance compensation factor
Im( ) = imaginary part in parentheses
Re( ) = real part in parentheses
L = line length (km)
120
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Distance calculation for earth fault (in the case of A-phase earth fault)
x1=
Im(Va I") L
(2)
where,
Va = fault voltage
I = fault current = (2Ia Ib Ic)/3
I" = change of fault current before and after fault occurrence
=
3
3
(3)
where,
k = propagation constant of the protected line = 0.001km-1 (fixed)
3.6.3
Starting Calculation
Calculation of the fault location is initiated by the operation of OC element. It is initiated only
when the direction of fault is forward (FWD).
3.6.4
Displaying Location
The measurement result is stored in the "Fault record" and displayed on the LCD on the relay front
panel or on a local or remote PC. For displaying on the LCD, see Section 4.2.3.1.
121
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.6.5
Setting
The setting items necessary for the fault location function and their setting ranges are shown in the
table below. The reactance and resistance values are input in expressions on the secondary side.
When there are large variations in the impedance of each phase, equation (4) is used to determine
the positive sequence impedance, zero sequence impedance and zero sequence mutual impedance,
while equation (5) is used to determine the imbalance compensation factors Kab to Ka.
When variations in the impedance of each phase can be ignored, the imbalance compensation
factor is set to 100%.
Z1 = {(Zaa + Zbb + Zcc) (Zab + Zbc + Zca)}/3
Z0 = {(Zaa + Zbb + Zcc) + 2(Zab + Zbc + Zca)}/3
(4)
(5)
Item
Range
Step
Default
R1
0.0 - 999.99
0.01
0.20
X1
0.0 - 999.99
0.01
2.00
R0
0.0 - 999.99
0.01
0.70
X0
0.0 - 999.99
0.01
6.80
Kab
80 - 120%
1%
100%
Kbc
80 - 120%
1%
100%
Kca
80 - 120%
1%
100%
Ka
80 - 120%
1%
100%
Kb
80 - 120%
1%
100%
Kc
80 - 120%
1%
100%
Line
0 - 399.9 km
0.1 km
50.0km
122
Remarks
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4. User Interface
4.1
4.1.1
Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, status and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing the ENTER key will display
the main- menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display at the top
of the main-menu. If any display is left for about 5 minutes without operation, the back-light will
go off.
LED
There are 14 LEDs. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in Test
menu.
TRIP
Red
ALARM
Yellow
Relay Fail
Red
CB CLOSED
R /G / Y
CB OPEN
Green
Local
Yellow
Remote
Yellow
(LED1)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED2)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED3)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED4)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED5)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED6)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
123
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.
Operation keys
, ,
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
CANCEL :
END :
Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.
ENTER :
CAUTION
The CB close control key is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key is linked to BO2,
when the control function is enabled.
USB connector
The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.
124
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.1.2
Communication Ports
The following two interfaces are provided as communication ports:
USB port
RS485 port
IRIG-B port
Optional Fiber optic or Ethernet LAN port for serial communication
Optional Communication Unit port
USB port
This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front
panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting operation and display
functions can be performed.
IRIG-B port
The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from an external clock to synchronize the
relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
RS485 port
The RS485 port is used for MODBUS or IEC60850-5-103 communication to connect between
relays and to construct a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.)
The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
Optional Secondary RS485 port
The optional secondary RS485 port is used for MODBUS or IEC60850-5-103 for redundant
communication. The secondary RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure
4.1.1.
Optional Fibre or Ethernet LAN port
Optional Ethernet LAN port can be connected to an automation system via an Ethernet
communication networks using the IEC 61850 protocol. 100Base-TX (T1: RJ-45 connector) or
100Base-FX (F1: ST connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided at the rear of the relay as shown in
Figure 4.1.1.
Optional secondary RS485 port and Optional Ethernet port are CANNOT be used at the same
time.
125
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.2
4.2.1
126
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Metering
I
127
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen for the Latest fault), press the RESET key
for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I
Status of element,
Elements depend upon user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operated (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P
: Faulted phases
: Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and
other configurable LEDs if signals are assigned to them triggered by tripping
128
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.
Press the RESET key for more than 3s to turn off the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable
LEDs (LED1 through LED6) that have been assigned as latched signals will be triggered by
tripping.
To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM"
LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the other screens are being displayed, the current screen
remains displayed and the "ALARM" LED lights.
While any of the menu screens are displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.
129
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
*
Four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press the RESET key. Clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
4.2.2
Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRE140. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix E.
130
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
MENU
Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
Status
Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Set. (change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Control
Password(Ctrl)
Local / Remote
CB close/open
Test
Password(Test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Logic circuit
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
131
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count and Iy count can be displayed or erased..
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, IEC60870-5-103), clock
adjustment and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name, relay address and baud rate in
communication, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable
binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings of password, plant name, relay address
and baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary
outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Control
The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote
position, the CB control location change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the CB
close/open position, the CB control keys and are enabled.
Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
The "Test" menu also has password security protection.
When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then
proceed to the relay menus.
M
To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the VIEW key
132
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
to turn off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " " , " " or " " displayed on the far right
shows that lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the and keys.
/
>
w
_
1
n
1
n
1
n
1
n
1
n
1
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
E, press the END or CANCEL key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3
Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count, Iy count and reclose count.
133
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
Select "View record" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the
top in new-to-old sequence.
/
1
0
2
0
3
0
0 1
0 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
0 0
Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press
the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
/
F a
J a
0 0
0 0
s e
. *
* %
f a
a l
* k
134
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
* k
* k
* k
* k
* k
* k
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
A
Not available for model 400 series
I 1
135
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
* *
* .
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
A
Not available for model 400 series
%
V
136
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
V
* *
* *
* *
* *
* .
n /
: 0
n /
: 0
n /
: 0
n /
: 0
R C
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and
keys.
To clear all the fault records, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C
Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in back-up RAM.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
137
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records
To display event records, do the following:
Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/
Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
3
E v
A g
A g
A g
J l
J n
M a
key.
138
1
O
Press the
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
0
O
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and
keys.
To clear all the event records, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C
Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in back-up RAM.
"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records
Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.
Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/
Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
139
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
1
0
2
0
3
0
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and
keys.
To clear all of the disturbance records, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C
L =
Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in back-up RAM.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter
Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
140
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Select "View Counter" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and
keys.
To clear each count, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C
141
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.
C
Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in back-up RAM.
4.2.4
142
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Status of LCD contrast
Data is updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data
To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/
s
k
c
Select " Metering " to display the current power system quantities on the "Metering" screen.
/
A
Not available for model 400 series.
143
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
I
If the primary side unit (A) is required, select 2(=Pri-A) on the "Metering" screen. See Section
4.2.6.6.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
144
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Select "Demand" to display the current demand on the "Metering" screen.
/
a x
* *
a x
* *
a x
* *
a x
* *
m a
* *
a x
* *
m a
* *
x -
* k
x -
* k
x -
* k
a x
* *
i n
* *
a x
* *
i n
* *
a x
* *
i n
* *
a x
* *
i n
* *
a x
* *
i n
* *
a x
* *
i n
* *
* *
* *
a x
* *
i n
* *
+ *
+ *
D e
145
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in back-up RAM.
Select "Direction" to display the direction of a current on the "Metering" screen.
The direction of each current is displayed when the directional characteristic is selected as
follows:
Ia, Ib, Ic: [OC-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
Ie: [EF-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
Ise: [SE-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
I2: [NC-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting
/
D i
O
]
]
]
]
0
]
]
146
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
For Models 402 and 422:
/
O
F
Input (IP)
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
Input2(IP2)
BI7
BI8
BI9
BI10
BI11
BI12
Input3(IP3)
BI13
BI14
BI15
BI16
BI17
BI18
Output (OP)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
Output2(OP2)
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
Output3(OP3)
BO11
BO12
BO13
BO14
BO15
BO16
FAIL
FAIL
The row IP shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. In
models 400 and 420 BI7 to BI18 are not available, BI13 to BI18 are not available for models 401
and 421. For binary input signals, see Appendix H. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or
"0" at the photo-coupler output circuit.
The row OP shows the binary output status. BO5 to BO16 are not available for models 400 and
420. BO11 to BO16 are not available for models 401 and 421.
The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the
output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements
To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/
]
]
]
0
]
]
147
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
B
]
0
]
]
]
]
]
0
]
]
The elements displayed depend upon the relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are as shown below.
[
OC#1
OC#2
OC2-C
OC3-A
OC3-B
]
OC3-C OC elements
OC elements
EF
EF1
EF3
EF4
EF elements
SEF
SEF4
SEF elements
NOC
NOC1 NOC2
UC
THM
BCD
BCD
CBF
ICD
CLP
OV#1
OV#2
UV#1
UV#2
ZOV
NOV
FRQ
ARC
RP
CBF-A
ICD-A
0
OV1-A
OV4-A
UV1-A
UV4-A
ZOV1
NOV1
FRQ1
OVB
RP1
EF2
NOC elements
UC2-A
UC2-B
UC2-C
UC elements
THM element
BCD element
CBF-B
ICD-B
1
OV1-B
OV4-B
UV1-B
UV4-B
ZOV2
NOV2
FRQ2
UVB
RP2
CBF-C
ICD-C
2
OV1-C
OV4-C
UV1-C
UV4-C
FRQ3
SYN
3
OV2-A
OV2-B
OV2-C
OV3-A
OV3-B
UV2-A
UV2-B
UV2-C
UV3-A
UV3-B
FRQ4
OVL
UVL
CBF element
ICD element
Cold Load state
OV3-C OV elements
OV elements
UV3-C UV elements
UV elements
ZOV elements
NOV elements
FRQ elements
ARC elements
RP element
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
148
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source
The internal clock of the GRE140 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are
active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the
following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
>
L ]
y
2
149
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [B], [M], [R] or [E] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
Enter a numerical value for each item and press the key. For details on how to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast
To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen, do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/
4.2.5
Press the
or
key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by
key.
key and thicker by pressing the
pressing the
150
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.2.5.1 Relay Version
To view the relay version, do the following.
Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/
>
>
R
S
e
.
Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE140-400A-10-10)
G
Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version. (ex.;GS1***-**-*)
M
151
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary
O/P" ,"LED" , "Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set.
(change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6
CAUTION
Modification of settings :
Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)
depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary
settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method
There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item
If a screen as shown below is displayed, setting can be performed setting as follows.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and
keys. If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
152
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
>
>
P
D
<
>
&
Set the cursor position in the grid square where you want the text to appear by selecting "" or
"" and pressing the ENTER key.
153
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Move the blinking cursor to a select the desired character.
Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the grid square.
Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:
Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first step.
To enter numerical values
When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If
a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/
>
Press the
or
key to set a desired value. The value is can be raised or powered by
pressing the
or
key.
Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
The numerical value entered can be modified as follows:
If the need to change the numerical value is decided before pressing the ENTER key, press
the CANCEL key and enter the new numerical value.
If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correct line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new numerical value.
154
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the
E N T E R
key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and the screen will return to the
upper level.
s
Y
When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen returns to
the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far and
to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2
Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes password protection can be set as follows:
Select "Set. (change)" on the " MAIN MENU " screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
Enter a 4-digit number within the grid square after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
S
)
]
For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the grid square after "Retype".
S
. (
6 7
)
]
Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
155
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.
S
. (
o r
6 7
)
]
>
P
D
To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 communication or Ethernet LAN (optional)
an address must be set. Do this as follows:
Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
156
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/
o d
>
M o
M o
I E
I E
.
_
2
2
2
0
>
_
0
l o
0
u s
3
0
u s
3
0
u s
157
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Select the number and press the ENTER key.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block transmission from relay to BCU for IEC60870-5-103
communication. When using the IEC60870-5-103 communication, select 1 (=Normal).
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function
To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/
>
>
t
_
0
Enter 1 to enable the fault locator. In order to disable the fault locator, enter 0.
Setting the event recording
Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/
E v
n
l
g n
e n
Select "Signal No." on the "Event" screen to enter the event setting.
158
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
S i
R N
>
T R
.
_
1 2
1 2
<BITRN>
Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If 20 is entered, both
status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is recorded
for EV21 to EV128 events.
<EV>
Enter the signal number in Appendix C to record the signal as an event. It is recommended that this
setting be performed using RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered in the LCD screen.
(Refer to Section 3.4.2.)
Select "Event name" on the "Event" screen to enter the event name.
/
E v
>
e n
* *
e n
* *
e n
* *
e n
* *
e n
* *
Enter the text string (up to 12 characters) of event name according to the text setting method.
159
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting the disturbance recording
Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/
>
>
i p
>
r i
f f
f f
f f
E F
f f
w
_
1
n
1
n
1
n
1
160
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N
O C
f f
f f
f f
O V
f f
O V
F f
1
/
n
1
n
1
n
1
n
1
>
Enter the signal number to be recorded from the binary listed in Appendix C.
Select "Signal name" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Signal name" screen.
/
>
161
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Enter the text string (up to 22 characters) for the signal name according to the text setting
method.
Setting the counter
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/
>
S
A
>
w
_
1
162
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
>
t
_
>
M
T
>
g
_
0
0
c
e
1
163
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Active Power Display
Power setting=0 (Send)
V
I
V
I
>
.
_
1
s
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRE140 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
164
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
>
>
_
.
>
C o
>
L C
P L
f /
P L
f /
P L
f /
n
_
1
P
1
165
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
A
P L
f /
F E
f /
F 1
f /
F 2
f /
S V
f /
S V
f /
S V
f /
L E
f /
0
/
0
/
0
/
2
M
&
2
M
&
/
2
&
/
1
<APPLCT>
Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=3P: 3 phase), 2(=2P: 2 phase) or 3(=1P: 1 pole) to set the current
input state and press the ENTER key.
<APPLVT>
Enter 0(=Off: not used) or 1(=3PN: 3 phase) and press the ENTER key.
<APPLVE>
Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=Ve: the zero-sequence voltage used is input directly) and press the
ENTER key.
<APPLVS>
Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1 (=Vs: voltage used for synchronism check) and press the ENTER
key.
AOLED
This switch is used to control the TRIP LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.
Enter 1 (=On) to light the TRIP LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the
key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the E N T E R key.
E N T E R
166
or
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
CTSVEN, V0SVEN, V2SVEN
or
G r
>
r a
i p
>
C T
t i
>
C T
0 0
C T
0 0
F C
0 0
0 0
V T
0 0
V T
0 0
Note: The "CT/VT ratio" screen depends on the APPLCT and APPLVT setting.
167
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
CAUTION
Do not set the CT primary rated current. Set the CT ratio.
(CT ratio) = (CT primary rated current [A]) / (Relay rated current [A])
Select "Fault Locator" to display the "Fault Locator" screen.
/
F a
>
n e
>
S
P
>
168
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Z
A p
>
C 1
I E
C 2
I E
F 1
I E
F 2
I E
E 1
I E
E 2
I E
C 1
I E
C 2
I E
1
C
U
1
U
1
U
1
1
C
1
C
U
1
169
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
O C
1 E N
>
C 1 E
F f /
C 1 -
W D /
O C 1
I / V
O C 1
I / V
O C 1
O 2 /
C 1 R
E F /
C 1 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
C 2 E
f f /
C 2 -
W D /
O C 2
I / V
O C 2
I / V
O C 2
O 2 /
C 2 R
E F /
C 2 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
C 3 E
f f /
C 3 -
_
1
0
O
N
0
T
I
0
P
0
0
O
N
0
T
I
0
P
0
170
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
F
W D /
C 3 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
C 4 E
f f /
C 4 -
W D /
C 4 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
C T P
P O R
N
0
0
/
N
0
0
/
OCEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
OC-DIR
To set the OC directional characteristic, do the following.
Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.
MOC1C, <MOC2C>
To set the OC1 and OC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MOC] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
If [MOC] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
If [MOC] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
OC1R, <OC2R>
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
If [MOC] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
OC1-2F, OC2-2F, OC3-2F, OC4-2F
Enter 1(=Block) to block the OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4 against the inrush current, and press
the ENTER key.
171
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
VTF-OCBLK
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the EF protection
1 E
>
F 1
f f
F 1
W D
E F
I /
E F
I /
E F
O 2
F 1
E F
F 1
A /
T F
f f
T F
f f
_
1
P
P
0
O
N
0
T
I
0
P
0
172
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
E
F 2
f f
F 2
W D
E F
I /
E F
I /
E F
O 2
F 2
E F
F 2
A /
T F
f f
T F
f f
F 3
f f
F 3
W D
F 3
A /
T F
f f
T F
f f
F 4
f f
F 4
W D
F 4
A /
T F
f f
T F
f f
P
0
O
N
0
T
I
0
P
0
0
P
P
0
N
0
0
P
P
0
N
0
173
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
C
U R
f f
EFEN
Enter 1(=On) to use an earth fault protection or enter 2(=POP) to use the directional earth fault
command protection (POP scheme), and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF, enter
To set the EF1 and EF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MEF] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the
key.
E N T E R
If [MEF] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
If [MEF] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
EF1R, <EF2R>
To set the CTF block and VTF block enable of EF, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the CTF function and VTF function, and press the
ENTER key. If disabling them, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
CURREV
To set which stage is used for current reverse detection in the command protection, do the
following.
Enter 1(=EF1), 2(=EF2), 3(EF3) or 4(=EF4) and press the ENTER key. If disabling them,
s
Y
174
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the SEF protection
S E
E N
>
1 E
f /
1 -
D /
E 1
/ V
E 1
/ V
E 1
2 /
1 R
F /
1 S
f /
1 -
/ B
F -
f /
2 E
f /
2 -
D /
E 2
/ V
E 2
/ V
E 2
2 /
2 R
F /
2 -
.
_
1
0
O
N
0
T
I
0
P
0
0
O
N
0
T
I
0
P
0
175
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N
/ B
F -
f /
3 E
f /
3 -
D /
3 -
/ B
F -
f /
4 E
f /
4 -
D /
4 -
/ B
F -
F /
E N
f /
0
/
N
0
0
/
N
0
0
O
SEEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF, enter
To set the SEF1 and SEF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MSE] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
If [MSE] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
If [MSE] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
SE1R, <SE2R>
176
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the Misc. protection
M i
1 E N
>
C 1 E
f f /
C 1 -
W D /
N C 1
I / V
N C 1
I / V
N C 1
O 2 /
C 1 R
E F /
.
_
0
0
O
N
0
T
0
D
177
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N
C 1 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
T F -
f f /
C 2 E
f f /
C 2 -
W D /
N C 2
I / V
N C 2
I / V
N C 2
O 2 /
C 2 R
E F /
C 2 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
T F -
f f /
C 1 E
f f /
T F -
f f /
C 2 E
f f /
T F -
f f /
H M E
f f /
H M A
f f /
C D E
f f /
0
O
N
0
T
I
0
P
0
0
n
178
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
B
C D -
A / B
T C
f f /
T C
f f /
L E N
f f /
L D O
f f /
P C B
s e /
P - U
A / B
P - P
i s a
o w e
e n d
P 1 E
f f /
P 1 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
T F -
f f /
P 2 E
f f /
P 2 -
A / B
T F -
f f /
T F -
f f /
k
0
n
0
C
0
0
e
0
0
E
0
R
e
0
NCEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the NC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NC, enter
179
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
NC-DIR
To set the NOC1 and NOC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
If [MNC] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
If [MNC] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
If [MNC] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
NC1R, <NC2R>
To set the CTF block and VTF block enable of NC, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the CTF function and VTF function, and press the
ENTER key. If disabling them, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
UCEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the UC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UC, enter
180
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
BCDEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable the Broken Conductor and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load drop-off, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
RPCB
disabling the RPCB, enter 1(=Nouse) and press the ENTER key.
RP-UVBLK
key. If disabling it, enter 0(=NA) and press the ENTER key.
RP-Power
181
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
When [RP-Power] is set to 1(=Enable) , enter 1(=Receive) to set the receiving direction setting,
or enter 0(=Send) to set the sending direction setting and press the ENTER key
RPEN
Enter 1(=On) to enable RP and press the ENTER key. If disabling RP, enter 0(=Off) and
To set the CTF block and VTF block enable for RP, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the CTF function and VTF function, and press the
ENTER key. If disabling them, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the OV protection
O V
E N
>
1 E
f /
2 E
f /
3 E
f /
4 E
f /
.
_
0
0
T
/
0
N
0
N
OV1EN, <OV2EN>
182
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
OV3EN, <OV4EN>
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3 or OV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3 or
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the UV protection
U V
r o
t .
V 1
E N
>
U V
1 E
O f
f /
/ I
D M
V T
F -
1 B
L K
O f
f /
U V
2 E
O F
f /
/ I
D M
V T
F -
2 B
L K
O f
f /
U V
3 E
O f
f /
V T
F -
O f
f /
U V
4 E
O f
f /
V T
F -
O f
f /
V B
L K
O f
f /
U V
H S
O f
f /
_
0
T
0
T
/
0
3 B
L K
4 B
L K
183
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
U V
H S
O f
f /
U V
D E
O f
f /
0
n
UV1EN, <UV2EN>
disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
UV3EN, <UV4EN>
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3 or UV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3 or
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the ZOV protection
Z O
>
1 E
V 1
f /
F -
f /
V 2
f /
.
_
0
T
0
/
184
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
V
F -
f /
ZOV1EN, <ZOV2EN>
disabling the ZOV1 or ZOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
VTF-ZV1BLK, VTF-ZV1BLK
To set the VTF block enable of ZOV1 and ZOV2, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the VTF function and press the ENTER key. If
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Select "NOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOV" screen.
/
N O
>
1 E
V 1
f /
F -
f /
V 2
f /
F -
f /
.
_
0
T
185
/
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
NOV1EN, <NOV2EN>
disabling the NOV1 or NOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
VTF-NV1BLK, < VTF-NV2BLK
To set the VTF block enable of NOV1 and NOV2, do the following.
Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the VTF function and press the ENTER key. If
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the FRQ protection
The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:
Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/
F R
>
1 E
Q 1
f /
Q 2
f /
Q 3
f /
Q 4
f /
R Q
f /
R Q
f /
R Q
f /
R Q
f /
.
_
0
F
0
F
0
F
0
186
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
FRQEN
disabling the FRQ, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
DFRQEN
If disabling the FRQ, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the protection elements
>
n t
>
187
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
T
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the EF elements
Select "EF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/
E F
>
E F
E F
E F
T E
F 1
T E
F 1
T E
F 1
188
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
T E
F 1
E F
T E
F 2
T E
F 2
T E
F 2
T E
F 2
E F
T E
F 3
E F
T E
F 4
T R
E B
E F
1 -
E F
1 -
ditto
E F
1 -
ditto
E F
1 -
ditto
E F
1 -
ditto
E F
2 -
E F
2 -
ditto
E F
2 -
ditto
E F
2 -
ditto
E F
2 -
ditto
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the SEF elements
Select "SEF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "SEF" screen.
189
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
S E
>
S E
S E
S E
T S
E 1
T S
E 1
T S
E 1
T S
E 1
T S
1 S
S E
T S
E 2
T S
E 2
T S
E 2
T S
E 2
S E
T S
E 3
S E
T S
E 4
S E
1 -
S E
1 -
S E
1 -
S E
1 -
S E
2 -
S E
2 -
S E
2 -
S E
2 -
S E
2 -
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
R P
1 -
S E
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
190
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting the Misc. protection elements
Select "Misc." on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/
M i
>
C 1
C 1
C 1
C 1
C 2
C 2
C 2
C 2
1 -
1 -
1 -
1 -
1 -
2 -
2 -
2 -
2 -
2 -
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
C 1
C 2
M 1
H M
M A
C D
191
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
T
T C
T C
D -
D O
F
0
L E
L R
L D
L D
1 D
P 1
B R
2 D
P 2
B R
V B
R
1
1
2
R
1
s
Y
192
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the OV elements
Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/
O V
>
V 1
V 1
V 1
1 D
P R
V 2
V 2
V 2
2 D
V 3
3 D
V 4
4 D
1 -
1 -
1 -
2 -
_
1
R
1
R
4
ditto
ditto
2 -
ditto
2 -
ditto
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
193
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting the UV elements
Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/
U V
>
V 1
V 1
V 1
V 2
V 2
V 2
V 3
V 4
L K
UV Blocking threshold
H S
H S
V D
1 -
1 -
ditto
1 -
ditto
2 -
2 -
ditto
2 -
ditto
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
194
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting the ZOV elements
Select "ZOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.
/
Z O
>
V 1
O V
O V
O V
V 2
O V
O V
O V
V 1
V 1
ditto
V 1
ditto
V 2
V 2
ditto
V 2
ditto
.
V
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the NOV protection elements
Select "NOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NOV" screen.
/
N O
>
V 1
O V
O V
O V
V 2
O V
.
V
195
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
T
O V
O V
V 1
V 1
V 1
V 2
V 2
V 2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
key.
E N T E R
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
Press the
s
Y
E N T E R
F R
>
Q 1
R Q
Q 2
R Q
Q 3
R Q
Q 4
R Q
_
-
z
z
B L
R Q
R Q
R Q
R Q
1
2
3
-
UV Blocking threshold
196
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C
s
Y
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the CTF/VTF elements
Select "CTF/VTF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "CTF/VTF" screen.
/
C T
>
F
_
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the autoreclose function
>
S
A
A R
h e
197
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
>
G e n
O C
E F
S E F
M i s
General
Select "General" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose mode.
/
G e
E N
>
C E
f /
C -
/ S
H K
f /
E N
f /
P H
B /
- R
- G
H -
s /
_
1
0
3
0
L
D
0
H
0
ARCEN
Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or to disable the autoreclose.
ARC-NUM
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 to set the number of shot.
198
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
VCHK
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= Off) to perform the reclose without voltage and synchronism check.
Enter 1 (= LD) to perform the reclose under "live bus and dead line" condition or with
synchronism check.
Enter 2 (= DL) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and live line" condition or with
synchronism check.
Enter 3 (= DD) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and dead line" condition.
Enter 4 (= S) to perform the reclose with synchronism check.
DfEN
Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= A) not to use A-phase voltage for voltage and synchronism check.
Enter 1 (= B) to use B-phase voltage.
Enter 2 (= C) to use C-phase voltage.
VT-RATE
Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.
O C
1 - I
>
C 1 -
A / O
C 1 -
F F /
C 1 -
.
_
0
K
2
199
t
2
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
O
F F /
C 1 -
F F /
C 1 -
F F /
C 1 -
F F /
C 1 -
F F /
C 2 -
A / O
C 2 -
F f /
C 2 -
F f /
C 2 -
F f /
C 2 -
F F /
C 2 -
F F /
C 2 -
F F /
C 3 -
A / O
C 3 -
F F /
C 3 -
F F /
C 3 -
F F /
C 3 -
F F /
C 3 -
F F /
C 3 -
F F /
C 4 -
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
0
K
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
0
K
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
200
t
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N
A / O
C 4 -
F F /
C 4 -
F F /
C 4 -
F F /
C 4 -
F F /
C 4 -
F F /
C 4 -
F F /
O O R
f f /
K
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
0
Enter 1(=INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the OC1 trip in
"OC1-INIT". To neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
Enter 1(=Inst) or 2(=Set) to set the OC1 first trip to Instantaneous trip or Set time delay trip
in the "OC1-TP1". To not use the OC1 trip, enter 0(=Off).
Note: OC1-TP2 to OC1-TP6 show the OC1 second trip to OC1 sixth trip.
M i
>
- I
T -
/ O
.
_
0
Enter 1(=On: INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the external trip. To
neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
201
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Setting ARC element
Select "ARC element" on the "Group " screen to set timer setting and the threshold setting of
OC, EF and SEF for co-ordination.
/
A R
>
D Y
U C
C O
R C
S E
N U
N O
N D
e g
N D
Y N
B D
t
s
B L
B D
- C
- C
- C
202
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C
s
Y
Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.
Setting group copy
To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/
>
Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input
The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/
>
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
203
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
B I
GRE140 can selected the binary input detection threshold voltage. The threshold voltage supports
control voltages of 24V, 48V, 110V and 220V.
BI1 and BI2 can be changed between three threshold voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)
BI3 to BI6, BI12 or BI18 can be changed between two threshold voltages 110 / 220V (or 24 /
48V)
Note: The threshold voltage of 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Surpervision
using 2 Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.
The threshold voltage of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to individual relay models,
respectively.
B I
H R
>
T H
/ 1
T H
0 /
s
_
0
0
0
BITHR1
key.
E
BITHR2
key.
E
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
204
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
>
T
F
Setting timers
Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/
T i
P U
>
F u
S N
>
r m
s
_
0
To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
4.2.6.9
Binary Output
All the binary outputs of the GRE140 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix C.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix H shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for longer than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
205
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Selection of output relay
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
>
B O
B O
B O
B O
>
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
/ 2
>
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
206
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
B O
B O
B O
B O
B O
Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used,
enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.
Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/
>
L
F
L o
i c
>
g i
/ A
s e
s /
e s
_
0
D
0
l
/ L
Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing
and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for longer than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
F u
>
n s
_
207
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
I
. 2
Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 471 to 477 and 487 to 490 (signal
names: "BO1 OP" to "BO16 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Six LEDs of the GRE140 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status of which can be
viewed on the LED screen as Virtual LEDs. The signals listed in Appendix C can be assigned to
each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, it is necessary to release the latch state on a digest
key for longer than 3 seconds.
screen by pressing the
R
Selection of LEDs
Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/
>
>
208
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/
>
i c
>
g i
/ A
s e
s t
R e
_
0
D
0
L
Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.
Assigning signals
Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
F u
>
n s
_
Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
209
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
Setting the LEDs color
Select "LED color" on the "LED " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the
"LED color" screen.
/
L E
o r
>
l o
G /
o r
_
0
>
I
I
Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/
>
R
F
R e
e t
>
s e
s t
t
_
0
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
210
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for longer than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
F u
>
T 1
T 2
T 3
T 4
T 5
T 6
T 7
T 8
n s
_
Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
The GRE140 can enable the control of Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close using the front panel
keys.
The interlock function can block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command by an interlock signal
from a binary input signal or a communication command.
To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:
Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/
>
_
0
n
0
n
Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select whether or not the control function is to be used and
press the ENTER key.
211
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select whether of not the interlock function is to be used
and press the ENTER key.
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.6.12 Frequency
The GRE140 is provided with a setting to select the system frequency i.e. 50Hz or 60Hz.
Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.
/
>
y
_
0
Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the
ENTER key.
CAUTION
When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE140 must reboot to enable the
setting change.
4.2.7 Control
The sub-menu "Control" enables the CB control function using the front panel keys - , and
L/R .
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Control
>
212
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
/
>
>
Password
For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:
Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
Enter a 4-digit number within the grid square after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
C
l
[
For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the grid square after "Retype".
C
n t
6 7
l
[
213
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password"
is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting
(change)" sub-menu screens.
C
n t
o r
6 7
l
[
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two grid square on the "Password" screen.
The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The password protection of the GRE140 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.8
Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring functions and
enables the forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to
enter the test screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section
4.2.6.2.) If the password trap is set, enter the password in the following screen.
T
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.
214
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch
The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/
>
y
c
>
_
1
n
0
0
/
3
0
0
S
6
0
Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
Enter 1(=On) for UVTDT to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the
ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=State0) or 2(=State3) to set forcibly the test condition of the Cold Load
Protection (CLPTST) and press the ENTER key.
Enter 1(=On) to set the reset delay time of the thermal overload element to instantaneous reset
for testing (THMRST) and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=S1) or 2(=S2) or 3(=S3) or 4(=S4) or 5(=S5) to set shot number
(SHOTNUM) for autoreclose test and press the ENTER key.
215
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit test mode to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay
It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with external
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/
>
P
_
0
0
a
b
0
b
0
b
0
b
0
0
b
b
0
Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O
?
C
Press the ENTER key continuously to operate the assigned output relays.
Release the ENTER key to reset the operation.
216
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.8.3 Logic Circuit
It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix C with monitoring
jacks A and B.
Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
/
L o
c i
m A
>
r m
r m
t
_
1
1
0 0
key.
E
Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the
key.
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.
4.2.8.4 Password
For the sake of security of testing password protection can be set as follows:
Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
Enter a 4-digit number within the grid square after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
T
For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the grid square after "Retype".
T
6 7
217
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "TEST" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "TEST"
sub-menu screens.
T
o r
6 7
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two grid square on the "Password" screen.
The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE140 is canceled. Set the password
again.
4.3
Oscillograph display
Harmonic analysis:
Frequency analysis:
218
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.4
MODBUS Interface
The GRE140 supports the MODBUS communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when
the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement
and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
Measurement data:
Status data:
current
Setting data
Remote CB operation
Open / Close
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See
Section 4.2.6.4.
4.5
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port or the Fibre optic port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See
Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.
4.6
219
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.7
Clock Function
The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
Event records
Disturbance records
Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP for IEC61850 etc. This can be
selected by setting (see 4.2.6.6.).
The clock synchronise function synchronises the relay internal clock to the BI (connected to
PLC input No.2576 SYNC_CLOCK) by the following method. Since the BI signal is an ON or
OFF signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is
achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if
the synchronising BI signal is input every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an OFF to ON (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~499ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
n sec
(n+1) sec
500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and "RSM" is
selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with
the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all of the
relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
4.8
Special Mode
The GRE140 shifts to the following special mode by using a specific key operation.
LCD contrast adjustment mode
Light check mode
LCD contrast adjustment mode
When the LCD is not displayed or not displayed clearly, the contrast adjustment of LCD might not
be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any screen, do the following:
Press and ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to LCD contrast adjustment mode.
L
220
or
Press the
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
key to adjust the contrast.
Press the
key all LEDs are lit and white dots appear on the whole LCD screen.
Release the
The colors of configurable LEDs displayed (LED1-6) are the user setting color.
221
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
5. Installation
5.1
Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2
Relay Mounting
The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.
Appendix F shows the case outlines.
This attachment kits can be mounted on a panel of thickness 1 2.5mm when the M4x8 screws
that are included with the realy are used. When mounted on a panel of thickness 2.5-4.5mm,
M4x10 screws and washers should be used.
5.2.1
Flush Mounting
For flush mounting the panel cut-out;
Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.
Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.
Tighten the M4 screw of the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.3.
The allowed range for the fixing screws tightening torque is 1.01.4Nm.
Do not tighten the screws too tightly.
222
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Fig. 5.2.3 Side view of GRE140 with the mounting attachment kit positions
223
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
5.3
Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are
very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
5.4
Handling Precautions
A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability
of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage.
5.5
External Connections
External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.
224
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects in hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
Reclosing circuit test
6.2
Cautions
6.2.1
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided on top of it.
Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
225
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.2.2
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
6.3
Preparations
Test equipment
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the users settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the following appendices:
Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the users
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
226
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
Hardware Tests
The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC current and
voltage sources are required.
6.4.1
User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
Press the
key for 3 seconds or more and check that white dots appear on the whole screen
and all LEDs are lit.
6.4
Operation keys
Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press any keys and check that all keys operate.
6.4.2
227
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
O
F
Apply the rated DC voltage to terminals 13 - 14, 15 - 16 , 17, 18, 19, 20 - 22 of terminal block
TB5 , terminals 13 - 14, 15 - 16 , , 23 - 24 of terminal block TB1 for model 4x1 or 4x2, and
228
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
terminals 13 - 14, 15 - 16 , , 23 - 24 of terminal block TB3 for model 4x2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
6.4.3
>
P
_
0
0
a
b
0
b
0
b
0
ditto
B
0
b
ditto
l
0
b
ditto
B
0
b
ditto
l
0
b
229
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
O
?
C
Press the ENTER key continuously to forcibly operate the output relays.
Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.
6.4.4
AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying known values of voltage and current to the AC input
circuits and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD
screen.
The testing circuits are shown in Figures 6.4.2. A three-phase voltage source and a single-phase
current source are required.
Check that the metering data is set to be expressed as secondary values on the "Metering switch"
screen.
230
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.5
Function Test
CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1
Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable
LED or a binary output relay.
CAUTION
After testing, it is necessary to reset the settings used for testing to the original settings.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] and [APPLVES] settings are selected 3P
and 3PV.
Assigning signal to LED
Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.
/
>
Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/
>
Note: The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
231
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Assigning signal to Binary Output Relay
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used,
enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/
>
L
F
L o
i c
>
g i
/ A
s e
s /
e s
_
0
D
0
l
/ L
F u
n s
>
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _
Assign the gate In #1 to the number corresponding to the testing element by referring to
Appendix B, and assign other gates the value 0.
232
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.5.1.1
Overcurrent and undercurrent element OC1 to OC4, UC1, UC2 and CBF and Earth fault
element EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4
The overcurrent element is checked for operating current value and operating time for an IDMT
curve.
Operating current check
Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The operating current value is checked by increasing or
decreasing the magnitude of the current applied.
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
OC1-A
101
EF1
131
SEF1
141
UC1-A
161
OC2-A
107
EF2
133
SEF2
143
UC2-A
164
OC3-A
113
EF3
135
SEF3
145
CBF-A
173
OC4-A
116
EF4
136
SEF4
146
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Set the scheme switches [-DIR] to NON.
Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
233
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Operating time check for IDMT curve
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
OC1-A
101
EF1
131
SEF1
141
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MOC1, MEF1 or MSE1 on the
"OC", "EF" or "SEF" screen.
Example: "Settings" sub-menu "Protection" screen "Group" screen "OC" screen
The test procedure is as follows:
Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 Is to 20 Is, where Is is the current setting.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. (For accuracy, refer to Appendix K.)
If checking the dependent time reset characteristic, use the output signal numbers 576 to 587
(_DEPRST). These signals output 1(logic level) when the value of internal time delay
counter is down to 0 in Figure 6.5.2.1 Dependent time reset characteristic in accordance with
IEC 60255-151.
234
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.5.1.2
OC elements and their output signal number are shown in Section 6.5.1.1.
The following describes the routine for testing OC1.
Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
235
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Apply three-phase rated voltage and single-phase test current IT (= Ia).
Set IT to lag Vbc by OC characteristic angle OC . (The default setting of OC is -45.)
Changing the magnitude of IT while maintaining the phase angle with the voltage, and
measure the current at which the element operates. Check that the measured current magnitude
is within 5% of the current setting.
EF element
Figure 6.5.4
EF elements and their output signal number are shown in Section 6.5.1.1.
The following describes the routine for testing EF1.
Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
236
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Apply the rated voltage VT (= V0) and single-phase test current IT (= Ise).
Set IT to lag V0 by SEF characteristic angle SE . (The default setting of SE is 0.)
Changing the magnitude of IT while maintaining the phase angle with the voltage, and
measure the current at which the element operates. Check that the measured current magnitude
is within 5% of the current setting.
6.5.1.3
The testing circuit is the same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.2.
The output signal of the testing element is assigned to a configurable LED.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
THM-A
167
THM-T
168
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current
should be between 1.2 Is to 10 Is, where Is is the current setting.
CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after first checking that the THM%
has become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.5. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
6.5.1.4
Signal No.
NOC1
169
NOC2
171
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Apply a three-phase balanced current and check the operating current value by increasing
the magnitude of the current applied.
237
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Changing the magnitude of the three-phase balanced current while retaining the phase angle
with the voltage, and measure the current Ia at which the element operates. Check that the
measured current magnitude is within 5% of the current setting.
238
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.5.1.5
Signal No.
BCD
172
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Apply the three-phase balanced current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.
The testing circuit is the same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.
To check the cold load protection function, the scheme switch [CLPTST] shown in the "Switch"
screen on the "Test" menu is used. Test the OC1 element as described in Section 6.5.1.1.
Set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S0".
Check that the OC1 element operates at the setting value in the normal setting group.
Next, set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S3".
Check that the OC1 element operates at the setting value for the cold load setting of
CLP-OC1.
6.5.1.7
239
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Signal No.
191
197
515
518
201
207
525
528
211
213
OV1-A
OV2-A
OV3-A
OV4-A
UV1-A
UV2-A
UV3-A
UV4-A
ZOV1
ZOV2
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, OV4, ZOV1, ZOV2
Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.8.
Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within 5% of the setting.
Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3, UV4
Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.8.
Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within 5% of the setting.
Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZOV1 IDMT curves
Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.2.1 and 2.2.2. Check the measured operating time.
240
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.5.1.8
Signal No.
NOV1
214
NOV2
216
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Apply the three-phase balanced voltage and check the operating voltage value by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.
241
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.5.1.9
Frequency Elements
Signal No.
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
FRQBLK
218
219
220
221
222
242
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Voltage and synchronism check elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Element
Signal No.
OVB
534
UVB
536
OVL
533
UVL
535
SYN
532
at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting.
OVL and UVL :
Adjust the magnitude of the voltage applied to terminal TB-A1 and B2 and measure the value
at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting.
Synchronism check element SYN
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press
the ENTER key.
Apply rated voltages VB and VL as shown Figure 6.5.11.
Voltage check:
Set the [DfEN] to "OFF", and set the voltage to any value over the SYNOV setting. (The
default setting of SYNOV is 51 V.)
Whilst keeping VL in-phase with VB, increase the single-phase voltage VL from zero volts.
Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that the measured voltage is
243
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
within 5% of the SYNUV setting.
Further increase VL and measure the voltage at which the element resets. Check that the
measured voltage is within 5% of the SYNOV setting.
To check the SYNDV detector, set the VB to a fixed value and increase the VL from zero
volts. Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that | VL VB| is within
5% of the SYNDV setting.
6.5.2
Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping can be observed by monitoring the tripping command output relays when a simulated
fault is applied.
Circuit Breaker failure tripping
Set the scheme switch [BTC] to "ON" and [RTC] to "DIR" or "OC".
Apply a fault, maintain it and input an external trip signal. Check that the retrip output relays
operate after the time setting of the TRTC and the adjacent breaker tripping output relay
operates after the time setting of the TBTC.
6.5.3
244
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on
how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
6.6
Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1
On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system
voltage and their respective phase angle with the metering displays on the LCD screen.
Open the "Auto-supervision" screen, check that no message appears.
Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.
/
A
Not available for model 400 series.
245
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Note:
The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by
selecting the appropriate setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)
The correctness of the polarity of the directional phase overcurrent element can be verified if the
current and voltage values and their respective phase angles are all ascertained as being correct in
the above metering check. Further, it can be also be checked as follows:
Select Direction on the Metering screen to display the Direction screen, the direction of
the current will be displayed. (See Section 4.2.4.1.) Check the direction of current is correct.
Note: Not available for models 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 40 and 42.
The correctness of the polarity of the directional earth fault element can be verified if the current
and voltage values and their respective phase angles are all ascertained as being correct in the
above metering check. Further, if required, it can be also checked as follows:
Check the operation of this element by simulating an unbalanced condition of the three phase
voltages and currents.
246
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
CAUTION: The tripping circuit must be blocked when performing this check by simulating an
unbalanced condition. After checking, all connections must be returned to their
original state.
6.6.2
>
P
_
0
0
a
b
0
b
0
b
0
ditto
B
0
b
ditto
l
0
b
ditto
B
0
b
ditto
l
0
b
BO1 to BO16 are output relays with one normally open contact.
247
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown below.
O
?
C
Continue to press the ENTER key to maintain the operation of binary output relay BO1 and
check that the A-phase breaker has tripped.
Release the ENTER key to reset the operation.
Repeat the above for BOs.
Reclosing circuit
Ensure that the circuit breaker is open.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
Select the BO number which is an autoreclose command output relay with one normally open
contact.
Note: The autoreclose command is assigned to any of the output relays by a user setting
248
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6.7
Maintenance
6.7.1
Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are the
binary input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing can be minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test
procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2
Failure location
CB or
AC cable
cable
Err: SUM
Err: ROM
Err: RAM
Err: CPU
Err: Invalid
Err: NMI
Err: BRAM
Err: EEP
Err: A/D
Err: SP
Err: DC
Err: TC
(Flash memory)
(ROM data)
(SRAM)
(CPU)
(Backup RAM)
(EEPROM)
(A/D converter)
(Sampling)
(DC power supply circuit)
(Tripping circuit)(1)
Err: CB
(Circuit breaker)(1)
Err: CTF
(1)
(1)
PLC data
(2)
(2)
(2)
(PLC data)
Err: PLC
249
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during regular testing, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power supply voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3
CAUTION
After replacing the relay unit, check the settings including the data related to the
PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit immediately following the
switching off the DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the
voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
6.7.4
Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.
Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5
Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but a temperature of 0C to +40C is
recommended for long-term storage.
250
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during
the tests.
Press the key and check that no failure messages are displayed on the "Auto-supervision"
screen.
Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit.
251
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix A
Programmable Reset Characteristics
and Implementation of Thermal Model
to IEC60255-8
252
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Figure A-1
253
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
t
I2
1 e 100%
2
I AOL
(1)
where:
= thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
= thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where
0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the point at which no
further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal
limit for any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output
when = 100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 100%), with time
constant , as in Figure A-2. If = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
(%)
100%
I2
I AOL
100%
2
I I 2 1 e
AOL
100 %
t (s)
Figure A-2
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 Hot and Cold curves.
I2
t =Ln 2 2
I I AOL
(1)
Cold curve
I2 I 2
t =Ln 2 2P
I I AOL
(2)
Hot curve
where:
254
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
IP = prior load current.
In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering
for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and
is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient
temperature.
()
Overload Current
Condition
Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition
Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure A-3
255
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix B
Directional Earth Fault Protection and
Power System Earthing
256
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
51N
67
V an
Prefault
V cn
IR
V an
Ia
Post-fault
Earth
n
V bn
V bn
V cn
VR
Figure B-1 Directional Earth Fault Protection for Solidly Earthed Systems
257
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
The relay characteristic angle setting is applied to compensate for lag of the fault current.
Generally accepted angle settings are -45 for solidly earthed distribution systems and -60 for
transmission systems.
Due to system imbalances and measuring tolerances, small levels of residual voltage can be
present during normal operating conditions. Therefore, GRE140 provides a voltage threshold
which must be exceeded before the directional protection will operate. Although this threshold is
user programmable, most applications will be satisfied by the default setting of 3V.
258
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
A
B
C
51N
51N
F
IF
IU2
IU1
-VR
IU3+....
Healthy
feeder
V an
Faulty
feeder
Earth (e)
IR1
Ib
n
V cn
IU2(=IR2)
Ic
IU1
IU1
IF=IU1+IU2+IU3+...
V bn
V an
V cn
n
V bn
It can be shown that the residual current measured in the faulty feeder is 180 out of phase with
that in the healthy feeder, as illustrated in Figure B-2 This fact can be used to apply a GRE140
directional sensitive earth fault relay. The polarising voltage used for directional earth fault
relays is normally -VR (the residual voltage inverted), and it can be seen that the residual current
(IR1) for the faulty feeder leads this voltage by 90. For the healthy feeders the residual current
lags the voltage by 90. Therefore, the GRE140 sensitive earth fault protection should be applied
with a characteristic angle of +90 so as to provide discriminatory protection.
The residual current in the faulted phase is equal to three times the per phase charging current,
and the sensitive earth fault element should be set well below this value to ensure operation
(30% of this value is typical).
3. Impedance earthing
In between the two extremes of solidly earthed and unearthed systems there are a variety of
compromise solutions, which normally involve connecting the system neutrals to earth via a
resistance or reactance.
3a. Resistance earthing
In the case of resistance earthed systems, GRE140 directional earth fault relays can normally be
applied in a similar manner to that for solidly earthed systems, with the exceptions that current
settings will be lower and the characteristic angle setting will probably be different. In the event
of a fault, it is the resistance in the neutral which predominates in the source impedance, and so
the residual current lags its polarising voltage by a much smaller angle. Characteristic angle
settings of -15 or 0 are common.
259
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3b. Reactance earthing
Reactance earthed systems are also common in many countries. A special case of this method is
known as Petersen coil, or resonant, earthing. The inductance in the neutral is chosen to cancel
the total capacitance of the system so that no current flows into an earth fault.
Directional sensitive earth fault protection can again be applied by detecting the unbalance in
charging currents. It can be shown that the residual current distribution for healthy and faulty
feeders is as illustrated in Figure B-3.
In the case of the healthy feeder, the residual current lags the polarising voltage (-VR) by more
than 90, while for the faulty feeder, the angle is less than 90. GRE140 directional sensitive
earth fault protection can be applied, with a 0 characteristic angle. Note that the SEF boundary
of directional operation should be set to 90. The residual current for the healthy feeder then
falls in the restraint zone, while for the faulty feeder it lies in the operate zone, thus providing
selective isolation of the fault.
-V R
-V R
Healthy
feeder
Faulty
feeder
Earth (e)
V an
V an
IR1
Operate Zone
n
V cn
V bn
Restraint Zone
IR2
V cn
n
V bn
PR I R V R cos
where is the phase angle between the residual current (IR) and the polarising voltage (-VR).
It is clear from Figure B-3 that this value will be positive when measured at the faulty feeder and
negative anywhere else. GRE140 directional sensitive earth fault protection can be applied with
a power threshold such that operation is permitted when residual power exceeds the setting and
is in the operate direction.
260
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix C
Signal List
261
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No. Signal Name
0 CONSTANT_0
1 CONSTANT_1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Contents
constant 0
constant 1
262
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
Signal Name
Contents
OC1-A
OC1-B
OC1-C
OC1-A_INST
OC1-B_INST
OC1-C INST
OC2-A
OC2-B
OC2-C
OC2-A_INST
OC2-B_INST
OC2-C_INST
OC3-A
OC3-B
OC3-C
OC4-A
OC4-B
OC4-C
OC1-A_HS
OC1-B_HS
OC1-C_HS
EF1
EF1_INST
EF2
EF2_INST
EF3
EF4
CUR-REV_DET.
EF1_HS
SEF1
SEF1_INST
SEF2
SEF2_INST
SEF3
SEF4
SEF1_HS
RPF
RPR
ICD-A
ICD-B
ICD-C
263
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No. Signal Name
Contents
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
UC1-A
UC1-B
UC1-C
UC2-A
UC2-B
UC2-C
THM-A
THM-T
NOC1
NOC1_INST
NOC2
BCD
CBF-A
CBF-B
CBF-C
ICLDO-A
ICLDO-B
ICLDO-C
OC-A_DIST
OC-B_DIST
OC-C_DIST
EF_DIST
SEF_DIST
NOC_DIST
NOC2_INST
OV1-A
OV1-B
OV1-C
OV1-A_INST
OV1-B_INST
OV1-C_INST
OV2-A
OV2-B
OV2-C
UV1-A
UV1-B
UV1-C
UV1-A_INST
UV1-B_INST
UV1-C_INST
UV2-A
UV2-B
UV2-C
ZOV1
ZOV1_INST
ZOV2
NOV1
NOV1_INST
NOV2
UVBLK
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
FRQBLK
ZOV2_INST
NOV2_INST
DFRQ1
DFRQ2
DFRQ3
DFRQ4
EFCF
ZOVCF
UVVF-A
UVVF-B
UVVF-C
UVVF-OR
OCDVF-A
OCDVF-B
OCDVF-C
OCDVF-OR
264
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
Signal Name
Contents
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
ZOVVF
EFVF
OC_COORD-A
OC_COORD-B
OC_COORD-C
EF_COORD
SEF_COORD
ZOV_DIST
NOV_DIST
OV-A_DIST
OV-B_DIST
OV-C_DIST
UV-A_DIST
UV-B_DIST
UV-C_DIST
OC1_TRIP
OC1-A_TRIP
OC1-B_TRIP
OC1-C_TRIP
OC2_TRIP
OC2-A_TRIP
OC2-B_TRIP
OC2-C_TRIP
OC3_TRIP
OC3-A_TRIP
OC3-B_TRIP
OC3-C_TRIP
OC4_ALARM
OC4-A_ALARM
OC4-B_ALARM
OC4-C_ALARM
EF1_TRIP
EF2_TRIP
EF3_TRIP
EF4_ALARM
EF1_CARRIER
EF2_CARRIER
EF3_CARRIER
EF4_CARRIER
SEF1-S1_TRIP
SEF1-S2_TRIP
SEF2_TRIP
SEF3_TRIP
SEF4_ALARM
UC1_TRIP
UC1-A_TRIP
UC1-B_TRIP
UC1-C_TRIP
UC2_ALARM
UC2-A_ALARM
UC2-B_ALARM
UC2-C_ALARM
THM_ALARM
THM_TRIP
NOC1_TRIP
NOC2_ALARM
BCD_TRIP
CBF_RETRIP
CBF_RETRIP-A
CBF_RETRIP-B
CBF_RETRIP-C
CBF_TRIP
CBF_TRIP-A
CBF_TRIP-B
265
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
Signal Name
Contents
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
CBF_TRIP-C
CBF_OP-A
CBF_OP-B
CBF_OP-C
OV1_TRIP
OV1-A_TRIP
OV1-B_TRIP
OV1-C_TRIP
OV2_TRIP
OV2-A_TRIP
OV2-B_TRIP
OV2-C_TRIP
UV1_TRIP
UV1-A_TRIP
UV1-B_TRIP
UV1-C_TRIP
UV2_TRIP
UV2-A_TRIP
UV2-B_TRIP
UV2-C_TRIP
ZOV1_TRIP
ZOV2_ALARM
NOV1_TRIP
NOV2_ALARM
FRQ_TRIP
FRQ1_TRIP
FRQ2_TRIP
FRQ3_TRIP
FRQ4_TRIP
DFRQ1_TRIP
DFRQ2_TRIP
DFRQ3_TRIP
DFRQ4_TRIP
GEN.TRIP
GEN.TRIP-A
GEN.TRIP-B
GEN.TRIP-C
GEN.TRIP-N
CLP_STATE0
CLP_STATE1
CLP_STATE2
CLP_STATE3
GEN.ALARM
GEN.ALARM-A
GEN.ALARM-B
GEN.ALARM-C
GEN.ALARM-N
CTF
VTF
VTF1
VTF2
CB_CLOSE
CB_OPEN
ARC_BLK_OR
Auto-Reclosing block
266
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
Signal Name
ARC_ READY_T
ARC_ IN-PR OG
ARC_ SH OT
ARC_ SH OT1
ARC_ SH OT2
ARC_ SH OT3
ARC_ SH OT4
ARC_ SH OT5
ARC_ FT
ARC_ SU CCESS
ARC_ CO OR D
VCHK
VCHK_SYN
VCHK_L BD L
VCHK_D BLL
VCHK_D BDL
Conten ts
Au to-R eclosing r eady condition
Au to-R eclosing in- progr ess con dito n
Au to-R eclosing shot
Au to-R eclosing shot of number1
Au to-R eclosing shot of number2
Au to-R eclosing shot of number3
Au to-R eclosing shot of number4
Au to-R eclosing shot of number5
Au to-R eclosing failed ( Final tr ip)
Au to-R eclosing succee d
Au to-R eclosing coor dination
Vo lta ge check fo r ARC
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
O V3_TR IP
O V3-A_T RIP
O V3-B_T RIP
O V3-C _TR IP
O V4_ALARM
O V4-A_ALARM
O V4-B_ALARM
O V4-C _ALARM
UV3_T RIP
UV3- A_TR IP
UV3- B_TR IP
UV3- C_T RIP
UV4_ALAR M
UV4- A_ALARM
UV4- B_ALARM
UV4- C_ALARM
O C1- OR
O C2- OR
O C3- OR
O C4- OR
O C1_IN ST- OR
O C2_IN ST- OR
UC 1-OR
UC 2-OR
CBF -OR
O V1-OR
O V2-OR
O V3-OR
O V4-OR
O V1_INST -OR
O V2_INST -OR
UV1- OR
UV2- OR
UV3- OR
UV4- OR
UV1_IN ST- OR
UV2_IN ST- OR
ICD -OR
BO1_OP
BO2_OP
BO3_OP
BO4_OP
BO5_OP
BO6_OP
BO7_OP
BO8_OP
BO9_OP
BO10_O P
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
267
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
Signal Name
BO 11_O P
BO 12_O P
BO 13_O P
BO 14_O P
BO 15_O P
BO 16_O P
Conten ts
Bina ry output
Bina ry output
Bina ry output
Bina ry output
Bina ry output
Bina ry output
O V2-A_IN ST
O V2-B_IN ST
O V2-C _INST
O V3-A
O V3-B
O V3-C
O V4-A
O V4-B
O V4-C
OV2- A
OV2- B
OV2- C
OV3- A
OV3- B
OV3- C
OV4- A
OV4- B
OV4- C
UV2- A_INST
UV2- B_INST
UV2- C_IN ST
UV3- A
UV3- B
UV3- C
UV4- A
UV4- B
UV4- C
UV2-A
UV2-B
UV2-C
UV3-A
UV3-B
UV3-C
UV4-A
UV4-B
UV4-C
r elay
r elay
relay
r elay
r elay
relay
r elay
r elay
relay
SYN
O VL
O VB
UVL
UVB
O C1- A_RST
O C1- B_RST
O C1- C_RST
O C2- A_RST
O C2- B_RST
O C2- C_RST
EF1 _RST
EF2 _RST
SEF1_ RST
SEF2_ RST
NO C1_ RST
NO C2_ RST
O V1-A_R ST
O V1-B_R ST
O V1-C _RST
O V2-A_R ST
O V2-B_R ST
O V2-C _RST
UV1- A_RST
UV1- B_RST
UV1- C_R ST
UV2- A_RST
UV2- B_RST
11
12
13
14
15
16
element
element
element
element
element
element
element
element
element
start
start
star t
outpu t
outpu t
o utput
outpu t
outpu t
o utput
268
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
Signal Name
UV2- C_R ST
Z OV1_R ST
Z OV2_R ST
NOV1_RST
NOV2_RST
UVBLK- A
UVBLK- B
UVBLK- C
Conten ts
ditto
ZOV1 r ela y elemen t definite time
ZOV2 r ela y elemen t definite time
NOV1 relay element d efin ite time
NOV2 relay element d efin ite time
UV blocked element oper ating
ditto
ditto
OC1- A_DEPRST
OC1- B_DEPRST
OC1- C_DEPRST
EF1 _DEPRST
SEF1_ DEPRST
NOC1_ DEPRST
OC2- A_DEPRST
OC2- B_DEPRST
OC2- C_DEPRST
EF2 _DEPRST
SEF2_ DEPRST
NOC2_ DEPRST
RP1
RP1_T RIP
RP2
RP2_ALAR M
RP1
RP1
RP2
RP2
269
reset
reset
reset
reset
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
Signal Name
Contents
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
270
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
Signal Name
Conten ts
BI1_CO MMAN D
BI2_CO MMAN D
BI3_CO MMAN D
BI4_CO MMAN D
BI5_CO MMAN D
BI6_CO MMAN D
BI7_CO MMAN D
BI8_CO MMAN D
BI9_CO MMAN D
BI10_C OMMAN D
BI11_C OMMAN D
BI12_C OMMAN D
BI13_C OMMAN D
BI14_C OMMAN D
BI15_C OMMAN D
BI16_C OMMAN D
BI17_C OMMAN D
BI18_C OMMAN D
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
Bina ry
E_F AU LT_ L1
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8
BI9
BI10
BI11
BI12
BI13
BI14
BI15
BI16
BI17
BI18
271
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
Signal Name
E_FAULT_L2
E_FAULT_L3
E_FAULT_FWD
E_FAULT_REV
PICKUP_L1
PICKUP_L2
PICKUP_L3
PICKUP_N
Contents
B phase earth fault signal for IEC103
C phase earth fault signal for IEC103
Earth fault forward signal for IEC103
Earth fault reverse signal for IEC103
A phase element pick-up for IEC103
B phase element pick-up for IEC103
C phase element pick-up for IEC103
Earth fault element pick-up for IEC103
FAULT_FWD
FAULT_REV
CBF_TP_RETP
IDMT_OC_TRIP
DT_OC_TRIP
IDMT_EF_TRIP
DT_EF_TRIP
272
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No. Signal Name
Contents
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
273
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
Signal Name
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040 FAULT_PHA_A
Contents
fault_phase_A
274
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No. Signal Name
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
FAULT_PHA_B
FAULT_PHA_C
FAULT_PHA_N
FL_ERR
FL_OB_FWD
FL_OB_BACK
FL_NC
FL_COMPLETED
Contents
fault_phase_B
fault_phase_C
fault_phase_N
fault location start up error
fault location out of bounds(forward)
fault location out of bounds(backward)
fault location not converged
fault location completed
275
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
Signal Name
Contents
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
276
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
Signal Name
Conten ts
IEC_MD BLK
IEC_T ESTMODE
G RO UP1_ACT IVE
G RO UP2_ACT IVE
RLY_F AIL
RLY_O P_BLK
AMF_ OF F
RELAY FAILU RE
RELAY OU TPU T BLO CK
SV BLO CK
RELAY_F AIL-A
IEC_R LY_FAIL- A
T RIP-H
CT _ERR_ UF
Tr ip signa l ho ld
CT err or( unfiltere d)
V0_ERR _UF
V2_ERR _UF
CT _ERR
V0_ERR
V2_ERR
T CSV
CBSV
T C_ALARM
SG M_Iy_ALM
O T_ALAR M
CT F_ AL AR M
VTF 1_ALARM
VTF 2_ALARM
V0 err or
V2 err or
Tr ip cir cuit super vision failur e
Circuit br eaker status monitor in g failure
Tr ip cou nter ala rm
IY alar m
Op erate time a la rm
CT failur e dete ction
VT failur e detection 1
VT failur e detection 2
G EN_PICKUP
277
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
1301 BI18_C OM_ UF
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
278
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
136 1
136 2
136 3
136 4
136 5
136 6
136 7
136 8
136 9
137 0
137 1
137 2
137 3
137 4
137 5
137 6
137 7
137 8
137 9
138 0
138 1
138 2
138 3
138 4
138 5
138 6
138 7
138 8
138 9
139 0
139 1
139 2
139 3
139 4
139 5
139 6
139 7
139 8
139 9
140 0
140 1
140 2
140 3
140 4
140 5
140 6
140 7
140 8
140 9
141 0
141 1
141 2
141 3
141 4
141 5
141 6
141 7
141 8
141 9
142 0
142 1
142 2
142 3
142 4
142 5
142 6
142 7
142 8
142 9
143 0
143 1
143 2
143 3
143 4
143 5
143 6
143 7
143 8
143 9
144 0
Contents
LOCAL_O P_ACT
REMOTE_O P_ACT
NORM_L ED _ON
ALM_LED_ON
TR IP_LED_O N
TEST _LED_ON
ARC_C O M_ON
LCD _IND.
LCD _IND1 .
LCD _IND2 .
279
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
144 1
144 2
144 3
144 4
144 5
144 6
144 7
144 8
144 9
145 0
145 1
145 2
145 3
145 4
145 5
145 6
145 7
145 8
145 9
146 0
146 1
146 2
146 3
146 4
146 5
146 6
146 7
146 8
146 9
147 0
147 1
147 2
147 3
147 4
147 5
147 6
147 7
147 8
147 9
148 0
148 1
148 2
148 3
148 4
148 5
148 6
148 7
148 8
148 9
149 0
149 1
149 2
149 3
149 4
149 5
149 6
149 7
149 8
149 9
150 0
150 1
150 2
150 3
150 4
150 5
150 6
150 7
150 8
150 9
151 0
151 1
151 2
151 3
151 4
151 5
151 6
151 7
151 8
151 9
152 0
Contents
AR C Co unter CLR
Demand cleared
PLC_da ta_CH G
IEC103_ data_C HG
IEC850_ data_C HG
Sys.set_change
Rly.se t_ch ange
G rp.set_chang e
PL C data chang e
IEC -10 3 data change
IEC -85 0 data change
System setting change
Relay sett ing cha nge
Gr oup setting chang e
KEY-VIEW
KEY-RESET
KEY-ENT ER
KEY-END
KEY-CANC EL
PLC_er r
PL C stopeed
SUM_er r
SRAM_er r
BU_RAM_ err
EEPR OM_err
A/D_er r
CPU_e rr
Tsk_ru n_err
Samplin g_err
DIO_er r
ROM_data _err
8M Romdata err or
Set._LO CAL
Set._REMOT E
LO CAL_OP_CMD
LO CAL_C L_CMD
RMT _OP_CMD_B
RMT _CL_ CMD_B
RMT _OP_CMD_C
RMT _CL_ CMD_C
CT RL_LOC K_ B
CT RL_LOC K_ C
CB_OPEN_O P
CB_CL OSE_O P
Se ttin g LOCAl
Se ttin g REMO TE
LOC AL OPEN CO MMAND
LOC AL CLOSE CO MMAND
REMOT E O PEN COMMAND (BI)
REMOT E CLOSE COMMAND (BI)
REMOT E O PEN COMMAND (COMM)
REMOT E CLOSE COMMAND (COMM)
CONTR OL LOCK(BI)
CONTR OL LOCK(C OMM)
CB OPEN OPERAT E
CB CLOSE OPER AT E
280
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o. Signal Name
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
Conten ts
281
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
Signal Name
OC1_BLOCK
OC2_BLOCK
OC3_BLOCK
OC4_BLOCK
Contents
OC trip block command
ditto
ditto
ditto
EF1_BLOCK
EF2_BLOCK
EF3_BLOCK
EF4_BLOCK
EF1_PERMIT
EF2_PERMIT
EF3_PERMIT
EF4 PERMIT
SEF1_BLOCK
SEF2_BLOCK
SEF3_BLOCK
SEF4_BLOCK
NOC1_BLOCK
NOC2 BLOCK
UC1_BLOCK
UC2_BLOCK
CBF_BLOCK
THM_BLOCK
THMA_BLOCK
BCD_BLOCK
DFRQ1_BLOCK
DFRQ2_BLOCK
DFRQ3_BLOCK
DFRQ4_BLOCK
OV1_BLOCK
OV2_BLOCK
OV3_BLOCK
OV4_BLOCK
UV1_BLOCK
UV2_BLOCK
UV3_BLOCK
UV4_BLOCK
ZOV1_BLOCK
ZOV2_BLOCK
NOV1_BLOCK
NOV2_BLOCK
FRQ1_BLOCK
FRQ2_BLOCK
FRQ3_BLOCK
FRQ4_BLOCK
ARC_BLOCK
ARC_READY
ARC_INIT
MANUAL_CLOSE
ARC_NO_ACT
282
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
Signal Name
C ontents
RP1_BLOCK
RP2_BLOCK
CT F_ BL OC K
VTF _BLOCK
C TF block commamd
VT F b lock commamd
EXT_C TF
EXT_VT F
EXT_T RIP- A
EXT_T RIP- B
EXT_T RIP- C
EXT_T RIP
T C_F AIL
CB_N /O_ CO NT
CB_N /C_CONT
IND .RESET
ARC- S1_COND
ARC- S2_COND
ARC- S3_COND
ARC- S4_COND
ARC- S5_COND
CBF _INIT -A
CBF _INIT -B
CBF _INIT -C
CBF _INIT
T P_ COUNT -A
T P_ COUNT -B
T P_ COUNT -C
T P_ COUNT
SG M_IY-A
SG M_IY-B
SG M_IY-C
OT_ALAR M-A
OT_ALAR M-B
OT_ALAR M-C
F RQ _S1_TR IP
F RQ _S2_TR IP
F RQ _S3_TR IP
F RQ _S4_TR IP
F re quency
F re quency
F re quency
F re quency
scheme
scheme
scheme
scheme
tr ip
tr ip
tr ip
tr ip
comma nd
comma nd
comma nd
comma nd
283
(Stag e1)
(Stag e2)
(Stag e3)
(Stag e4)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
Signal Name
Contents
OC1_INST_TP
OC2_INST_TP
OC3_INST_TP
OC4_INST_TP
EF1_INST_TP
EF2_INST_TP
EF3_INST_TP
EF4_INST_TP
SEF1_INST_TP
SEF2_INST_TP
SEF3_INST_TP
SEF4_INST_TP
284
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
:
:
:
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
:
:
:
2557
2558
2559
Signal Name
C ontents
285
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
Signal Name
DISP.ALARM1
DISP.ALARM2
DISP.ALARM3
DISP.ALARM4
Contents
Indicate the alarm display
ditto
ditto
ditto
SYNC_CLOCK
ALARM_LED_SET
F.RECORD1
F.RECORD2
F.RECORD3
F.RECORD4
D.RECORD1
D.RECORD2
D.RECORD3
D.RECORD4
286
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
N o.
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
Signal Name
SET.GROUP1
SET.GROUP2
C ontents
Active set ting grou p ch anged command ( Cha nge to gr oup1)
2
CON_T PMD1
CON_T PMD2
CON_T PMD3
CON_T PMD4
CON_T PMD5
CON_T PMD6
CON_T PMD7
CON_T PMD8
ARC_ COM_RECV
OP_CMD_ RECV
C B open command r eceived
CL_ CMD_R ECV
C B close command r eceived
LOCK_CM D_RECV C ontr ol lock comma nd re ceived
287
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No. Signal Name
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
Contents
288
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
Signal Name
Contents
TEMP001
TEMP002
TEMP003
TEMP004
TEMP005
TEMP006
TEMP007
TEMP008
TEMP009
TEMP010
TEMP011
TEMP012
TEMP013
TEMP014
TEMP015
TEMP016
TEMP017
TEMP018
TEMP019
TEMP020
TEMP021
TEMP022
TEMP023
TEMP024
TEMP025
TEMP026
TEMP027
TEMP028
TEMP029
TEMP030
TEMP031
TEMP032
TEMP033
TEMP034
TEMP035
TEMP036
TEMP037
TEMP038
TEMP039
TEMP040
TEMP041
TEMP042
TEMP043
TEMP044
TEMP045
TEMP046
TEMP047
TEMP048
TEMP049
TEMP050
TEMP051
TEMP052
TEMP053
TEMP054
TEMP055
TEMP056
TEMP057
TEMP058
TEMP059
TEMP060
TEMP061
TEMP062
TEMP063
TEMP064
289
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
Signal Name
TEMP065
TEMP066
TEMP067
TEMP068
TEMP069
TEMP070
TEMP071
TEMP072
TEMP073
TEMP074
TEMP075
TEMP076
TEMP077
TEMP078
TEMP079
TEMP080
TEMP081
TEMP082
TEMP083
TEMP084
TEMP085
TEMP086
TEMP087
TEMP088
TEMP089
TEMP090
TEMP091
TEMP092
TEMP093
TEMP094
TEMP095
TEMP096
TEMP097
TEMP098
TEMP099
TEMP100
TEMP101
TEMP102
TEMP103
TEMP104
TEMP105
TEMP106
TEMP107
TEMP108
TEMP109
TEMP110
TEMP111
TEMP112
TEMP113
TEMP114
TEMP115
TEMP116
TEMP117
TEMP118
TEMP119
TEMP120
TEMP121
TEMP122
TEMP123
TEMP124
TEMP125
TEMP126
TEMP127
TEMP128
TEMP129
TEMP130
TEMP131
TEMP132
TEMP133
TEMP134
TEMP135
TEMP136
TEMP137
TEMP138
TEMP139
TEMP140
TEMP141
TEMP142
TEMP143
TEMP144
Contents
290
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
Signal Name
TEMP145
TEMP146
TEMP147
TEMP148
TEMP149
TEMP150
TEMP151
TEMP152
TEMP153
TEMP154
TEMP155
TEMP156
TEMP157
TEMP158
TEMP159
TEMP160
TEMP161
TEMP162
TEMP163
TEMP164
TEMP165
TEMP166
TEMP167
TEMP168
TEMP169
TEMP170
TEMP171
TEMP172
TEMP173
TEMP174
TEMP175
TEMP176
TEMP177
TEMP178
TEMP179
TEMP180
TEMP181
TEMP182
TEMP183
TEMP184
TEMP185
TEMP186
TEMP187
TEMP188
TEMP189
TEMP190
TEMP191
TEMP192
TEMP193
TEMP194
TEMP195
TEMP196
TEMP197
TEMP198
TEMP199
TEMP200
TEMP201
TEMP202
TEMP203
TEMP204
TEMP205
TEMP206
TEMP207
TEMP208
TEMP209
TEMP210
TEMP211
TEMP212
TEMP213
TEMP214
TEMP215
TEMP216
TEMP217
TEMP218
TEMP219
TEMP220
TEMP221
TEMP222
TEMP223
TEMP224
Contents
291
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
No.
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
Signal Name
TEMP225
TEMP226
TEMP227
TEMP228
TEMP229
TEMP230
TEMP231
TEMP232
TEMP233
TEMP234
TEMP235
TEMP236
TEMP237
TEMP238
TEMP239
TEMP240
TEMP241
TEMP242
TEMP243
TEMP244
TEMP245
TEMP246
TEMP247
TEMP248
TEMP249
TEMP250
TEMP251
TEMP252
TEMP253
TEMP254
TEMP255
TEMP256
Contents
292
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix D
Binary Output Default Setting list
293
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay
Model
BO
No.
GRE140 BO1
-400 BO2
BO3
BO4
R.F.
GRE140 BO1
-401 BO2
Terminal
No.
TB5:
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
TB5:
1-2
3-4
Signal
Name
Contents
Signal No.
Logic
(OR:0,
AND:1)
Reset
(Inst:0, Del:1
DW:2 Latch:3)
0
371
0
0
1
1
380
536
0
0
1
1
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
141
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
NON
GENERAL TRIP
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
TB1:
12
34
56
78
9 10
11 12
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
NON
NON
NON
NON
GRE140 BO1
-402 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3-4
Setting
NON
GENERAL TRIP
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
TB1:
12
34
56
78
9 10
11 12
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
NON
NON
NON
NON
141
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
BO11
BO12
BO13
BO14
BO15
BO16
TB3;
12
34
56
78
9 10
11 12
NON
NON
NON
NON
GENERAL ALARM
GENERAL TRIP
Off
Off
Off
Off
Relay alarm (General)
Relay trip (General)
0
0
0
0
150
141
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
NON
GENERAL TRIP
294
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay
Model
BO
No.
GRE140 BO1
-420 BO2
BO3
BO4
R.F.
GRE140 BO1
-421 BO2
Terminal
No.
TB5:
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
TB5:
1-2
3-4
Signal
Name
Contents
Signal No.
Logic
(OR:0,
AND:1)
Reset
(Inst:0, Del:1
DW:2 Latch:3)
0
371
0
0
1
1
380
536
0
0
1
1
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
141
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
NON
GENERAL TRIP
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
TB1:
12
34
56
78
9 10
11 12
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
NON
NON
NON
NON
GRE140 BO1
-422 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3-4
Setting
NON
GENERAL TRIP
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
TB1:
12
34
56
78
9 10
11 12
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
NON
NON
NON
NON
141
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
BO11
BO12
BO13
BO14
BO15
BO16
TB3;
12
34
56
78
9 10
11 12
NON
NON
NON
NON
GENERAL ALARM
GENERAL TRIP
Off
Off
Off
Off
Relay alarm (General)
Relay trip (General)
0
0
0
0
150
141
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
NON
GENERAL TRIP
295
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix E
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Keypad Operation
296
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
MAIN MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Control
Test
/1 Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/2 Fault
View record
Clear
/3 Fault
#1 16/Jul/2011
18:13:57.031
Refer to Section
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Event
View record
Clear
/3 Event
16/Jul/2011 480
OC1-A trip On
Refer to Section
4.2.3.2.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Disturbance
View record
Clear
Refer to Section
4.2.3.3.
/3 Disturbance
#1 16/Jul/2011
18:13:57.401
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1 b-1
297
/4 Fault #1
16/Jul/2011
18:13:57.031
OCT1
Phase ABC
***.**km(**)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-1
/2 Counter
View record
Clear Trips
Clear Trips A
Clear Trips B
Clear Trips C
Clear I^yA
Clear I^yB
Clear I^yC
Clear ARCs
Refer to Section
4.2.3.4.
/3 Counter
Trips *****
TripsA *****
TripsB *****
TripsC *****
I^yA ******E6
I^yB ******E6
I^yC ******E6
ARCs ******
Clear Trips?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear ARCs?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
298
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1
/1 Status
Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
/3 Metering
la
**.** kA
/2 Metering
Metering
Demand
Direction
/3 Demand
lamax
**.** kA
/2 Binary I/O
IP [0000 00 ]
/3 Direction
la
Forward
/2 Ry element
OC#1[000000000]
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 12/Nov/2011
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
/2 Version
Relay type
Software
/2 Description
Plant name
Description
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
/2 Comms
Addr.
Switch
GRE140-402A-10
-10
Main Software
GSP***-04-*
/3 Addr.
Modbus
/3 Switch
RS485BR
a-1, b-1
299
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-1
/2 Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/3 Fault
FL
Off/On
/3 Event
Signal No.
Event name
/3 Disturbance
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig.
Signal name
/4 Signal No.
BITRN
100
/4 Event name
Event name1
/4 Time/starter
Time1
2.0s
/4 Scheme sw
TRIP
0
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1
/4 Signal name
Signal name1
/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Metering
Display
1
/3 Time sync.
Time sync
0
/2 Act. gp. =*
Common
Group1
Group2
/3 Common
APPLCT
/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
300
/4 Scheme sw
TCSPEN
/4 Alarm set
TCALM 10000
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
/4 Parameter
Line name
CT/VT ratio
Fault loc.
/5 CT/VT ratio
OCCT
400
/5 Fault Loc.
X1
10.0
/6 Application
MOC1
0
/4 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/5 Scheme sw
Application
OC prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZOV prot.
NOV prot.
FRQ prot.
/6 OC prot.
OC1EN
1
/6 EF prot.
EF1EN
1
/6 SEF prot.
SEF1EN
1
/6 Misc prot.
NC1EN
1
/6 OV prot.
OV1EN
1
/6 UV prot.
UV1EN
1
/6 ZOV prot.
ZOV1EN
1
/6 NOV prot.
NOV1EN
1
/6 FRQ prot.
FRQ1EN
1
a-1
b-1
C-1
d-1
e-1
301
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1
b-1
c-1
d-1 e-1
/6 OC prot.
OC
45
/5 Prot.element
OC prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZOV prot.
NOV prot.
FRQ prot.
CTF/VTF
/6 EF prot.
EF
45
/6 SEF prot.
SE
+90
/6 Misc.prot.
UC1
0.40A
/6 OV prot.
OV1
120.0V
/6 UV prot.
UV1
60.0V
/6 ZOV prot.
ZOV1
20.0V
/6 NOV prot.
NOV1
20.0V
/6 FRQ prot.
FRQ1
1.00Hz
/6 CTF/VTF
EFF
0.20A
/4 ARC
Scheme sw
ARC element
/6 General
ARCEN
1
/5 Scheme SW
General
OC prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc prot.
/6 OC prot.
OC1-INIT
0
/6 EF prot.
EF1-INIT
0
/5 ARC element
TRDY
60.0s
/6 SEF prot.
SEF1-INIT
0
/6 Misc prot.
EXT-INIT
0
a-1
b-1
C-1
302
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1
b-1
c-1
/3 Group2
Parameter
/2 Binary I/P
BI Status
BI1
BI2
/3 BI Status
BITHR1
0
/3 BI1
Timer
Functions
/4 Timers
BI1PUD
0.00s
/4 Functions
BI1SNS
0
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, INS
, ,
BO2 AND, INS
, ,
BO16 OR, L
, ,
TBO1
0.20s
TBO16
0.20s
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/3 LED
LED1
OR, I R
/3 Virtual LED
IND1
IND2
/2 Control
Control
Interlock
/2 Frequency
a-1 b-1
303
/4 LED1
BIT1
I,O
/4 LED2
BIT1
I,O
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1
/1 Set.(change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Set.(change)
Input
[_ ]
1234567890
: Password trap
Password [_ ]
1234567890
: Confirmation trap
Change settings?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
Set.(change)
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890
/2 Description
Plant name
Description
Alarm1 Text
:
Alarm4 Text
/2 Comms
Addr.
Switch
_
ABCDEFG
_
ABCDEFG
/3 Addr.
/3 Switch
Refer to Section
4.2.6.4.
/2 Record
Fault
Disturbance
Counter
Refer to Section
4.2.6.5.
/3 Fault
FL
/3 Disturbance
Time/starter
Scheme sw
/4 Time/starter
/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Alarm set
a-1 b-2
304
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-2
/3 Metering
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Time sync.
Refer to Section 4.2.6.6.
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set.
Copy gp.
Refer to Section
4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
/4 Common
/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/5 Parameter
Line name
CT/VT ratio
Fault loc.
_
ABCDEFG
/6 CT/VT ratio
/6 Fault Loc.
a-1 b-2
305
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
e-2
/5 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Scheme sw
Application
OC prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc prot.
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZOV prot.
NOV prot.
FRQ prot.
/7 Application
/7 OC prot.
/7 EF prot.
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc. prot.
/7 OV prot.
/7 UV prot.
/7 ZOV prot.
/7 NOV prot.
/7 FRQ prot.
306
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
e-2 f-2
/7 OC prot.
/6 Prot.element
OC prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc prot.
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZOV prot.
NOV prot.
FRQ prot.
CTF/VTF
/7 EF prot.
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc prot.
/7 OV prot.
/7 UV prot.
/7 ZOV prot.
/7 NOV prot.
/7 FRQ prot.
/7 CTF/VTF
/5 ARC
Scheme sw
ARC element
/7 General
/6 Scheme SW
General
OC prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc prot.
/7 OC prot.
/7 EF prot.
/6 ARC element
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc prot.
307
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-2 c-2
d-2
/4 Group2
Parameter
/3 Copy A to B
A
_
B
_
/3 BI1
Timers
Functions
/2 Binary I/P
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
/4 Timers
/4 Functions
/3 BI*
Timers
Functions
BI17
BI18
Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
/2 Binary O/P
BO1
BO2
/3 BO1
Logic/Reset
Functions
/4 Logic/Reset
/4 Functions
/3 BO16
Logic/Reset
Functions
BO15
BO16
Refer to Section
4.2.6.9.
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/3 LED
LED1
LED6
CB CLOSED
a-1 b-2
c-3
Refer to Section
4.2.6.10.
/4 LED1
Logic/Reset
Functions
LED Color
/4 LED6
Logic/Reset
/4 CB CLOSED
LED Color
308
/5 Logic/Reset
/5 Functions
/5 LED Color
/5 LED Color
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
a-1 b-2
c-3
/3 Virtual LED
IND1
IND2
/4 IND1
Reset
Functions
/5 Reset
/5 Functions
/2 Control
Control
1
Disable/Enable
Interlock 0
Disable/Enable
/4 IND2
Reset
Functions
/2 Frequency
Frequency 0
50Hz/60Hz
/1 Control
Password(Ctrl)
Local/Remote
CB close/open
Control
Input
[_ ]
1234567890
Control
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890
/1 Test
Password(Test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Test
Input
[_ ]
1234567890
Test
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890
/2 Switch
A.M.F
: Password trap
Password [_ ]
1234567890
/2 Binary O/P
309
Operate?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix F
Case Outline
310
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Case Outline
311
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix G
Typical External Connections
312
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
GRE140 400A
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
A
B
C
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
Control
Power
P
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
UVB
GRE140-400A
CB CLOSE
SW
TB2
1
Va
2
3
Vb
4
5
Vc
6
7
Ve
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
FG
TB5
CB CLOSE
1
2
CB OPEN/TRIP
CB OPEN
SW
3
4
TRIP
COIL
AUXILIARY
5
6
CLOSE
COIL
AUXILIARY
7
8
*
Relay fail
TB4
AUXILIARY
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ie
8
9
Vs
10
11 IRIG-B
12
13 N.C. Optional
14 COM RS485
15 A+
16 B- ***
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
CB CLOSED
Threshold
77/154V
CB OPEN
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Optional Communication
Port ***
COM
A+
B-
Relay fail
indicator
N
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
21
23
24
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
100BASE-TX
1port / 2port
100BASE-FX
1port / 2port
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed. (1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
*** Available at one of the communication function is selected.
313
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
GRE140 401A
314
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
GRE140 421A
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
A
B
C
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Control
Power
GRE140-421A
TB2
1
Va
2
3
Vb
4
5
Vc
6
7
Ve
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
TB5
CB CLOSE
SW
CB OPEN
SW
Core
balance
CT
1
2
CB OPEN/TRIP
3
4
TRIP
COIL
AUXILIARY
5
6
CLOSE
COIL
AUXILIARY
7
8
Relay fail
FG
CB CLOSE
TB4
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ise
8
9
Vs
10
11 IRIG-B
12
13 N.C.
14 COM Optional
15 A+ RS485
16 B- ***
Optional Communication
Port ***
100BASE-TX
1port / 2port
100BASE-FX
1port / 2port
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
CB CLOSED
Threshold
77/154V
CB OPEN
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
COM
Relay fail
indicator
N
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
21
A+ 23
B- 24
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
TB1
1
2
3
4
5
*
6
7
*
8
9
*
10
11
*
12
N.C. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
315
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
GRE140 402A
316
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Binary output setting
4. Relay setting
5. Disturbance record signal setting
6. LED setting
317
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
1. Relay Identification
Date:
Relay type
Serial Number
Frequency
AC current
AC voltage
DC supply voltage
Password
Active setting group
2. Line parameter
CT ratio
OC:
EF:
SEF:
VT ratio
PVT:
EVT:
SVT:
318
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3. Binary output setting
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
Setting
Device
Name
Range
Unit
Contents
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Default Setting
Model
400A, 420A
401A, 421A
402A, 422A
Settin
Signal
Settin
Signal
Settin
Signal
OR
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-371 GEN.TRIP 371 GEN.TRIP 371 GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-380 GEN.ALARM 380 GEN.ALARM 380 GEN.ALARM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-Dl
-536
UVB
536
UVB
536
UVB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-371 GEN.TRIP 371 GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-380 GEN.ALARM 380 GEN.ALARM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
-OR
-OR
-Dl
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-0.20
--
319
Setting
Model
Setting
Signal
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
BO9
BO
10
BO
11
BO
12
BO
13
BO
14
BO
15
BO
16
Setting
Device
Name
Range
Unit
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #5
In #6
TBO
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
Contents
400A, 420A
Settin
Signal
Logic gate
-Reset application
-Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
-Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
320
Default Setting
Model
401A, 421A
Settin
Signal
OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
--
402A, 422A
Settin
Signal
OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-380 GEN.ALARM
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
-OR
-Dl
-371 GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
Setting
Model
Setting
Signal
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4. Relay setting
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
(Offset
No.)
21000
21001
21010
21002
21004
21003
21005
21006
21007
21008
21009
21011
21012
21013
21014
21015
5000
6000
6001
6003
6004
6005
6006
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1208
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1209
1021
1022
1023
1210
1024
1025
1026
1211
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
(No.)
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
Units
5A rating
1A rating
Active group
APPLCT
APPLVT
APPLVE
APPLVS
CTFEN
VTF1EN
VTF2EN
CTSVEN
V0SVEN
V2SVEN
AOLED
Control
Interlock
Control Kind
Frequency
Line name
OCCT
EFCT
SEFCT
PVT
VEVT
VSVT
FL
X1
X0
R1
R0
Kab
Kbc
Kca
Ka
Kb
Kc
Line
1-2
Off - 3P - 2P - 1P
Off - 3PN
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On - OPT-On
Off - On - OPT-On
Off - On - OPT-On
Off - ALM&BLK - ALM
Off - ALM&BLK - ALM
Off - ALM&BLK - ALM
Off - On
Disable-Enable
Disable-Enable
Local - Remote
50Hz - 60Hz
Specified by user
1 - 20000
1 - 20000
1 - 20000
1 - 20000
1 - 20000
1 - 20000
0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
0.00 - 199.99
0.0 - 999.9
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
80 - 120
0.0 - 399.9
MOC1
MOC2
MEF1
MEF2
MSE1
MSE2
MNC1
MNC2
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
OC
EF
OC1EN
OC1-DIR
MOC1C-IEC
MOC1C-IEEE
MOC1C-US
OC1R
OC1-2F
VTF-OC1BLK
OC2EN
OC2-DIR
MOC2C-IEC
MOC2C-IEEE
MOC2C-US
OC2R
OC2-2F
VTF-OC2BLK
OC3EN
OC3-DIR
OC3-2F
VTF-OC3BLK
OC4EN
OC4-DIR
OC4-2F
VTF-OC4BLK
OCTP
EF1EN
EF1-DIR
MEF1C-IEC
Contents
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
3POR - 2OUTOF3
Off - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
%
%
%
%
%
%
km
321
3P
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
ALM
ALM
ALM
On
Enable
Disable
-- (Local)
50Hz
400
200
--
400
100
100
100
10.0
34.0
1.0
3.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
50.0
D
D
D
D
---
D
D
D
D
On
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
FWD
NA
Off
On
FWD
NA
Off
3POR
On
FWD
NI
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
(No.)
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
(Offset
No.)
1031
1032
1033
1034
1212
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1213
1043
1044
1045
1046
1214
1047
1048
1049
1050
1215
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1216
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1217
1068
1069
1070
1218
1071
1072
1073
1219
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1220
1082
1083
1084
1085
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1086
1087
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
Units
5A rating
EF
SEF
NOC
MEF1C-IEC
MEF1C-IEEE
MEF1C-US
EF1R
EF1-2F
CTF-EF1BLK
VTF-EF1BLK
EF2EN
EF2-DIR
MEF2C-IEC
MEF2C-IEEE
MEF2C-US
EF2R
EF2-2F
CTF-EF2BLK
VTF-EF2BLK
EF3EN
EF3-DIR
EF3-2F
CTF-EF3BLK
VTF-EF3BLK
EF4EN
EF4-DIR
EF4-2F
CTF-EF4BLK
VTF-EF4BLK
CURREV
SE1EN
SE1-DIR
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US
SE1R
SE1S2
SE1-2F
VTF-SE1BLK
SE2EN
SE2-DIR
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US
SE2R
SE2-2F
VTF-SE2BLK
SE3EN
SE3-DIR
SE3-2F
VTF-SE3BLK
SE4EN
SE4-DIR
SE4-2F
VTF-SE4BLK
RPEN
NC1EN
NC1-DIR
MNC1C-IEC
MNC1C-IEEE
MNC1C-US
NC1R
NC1-2F
CTF-NC1BLK
VTF-NC1BLK
NC2EN
NC2-DIR
MNC2C-IEC
MNC2C-IEEE
MNC2C-US
NC2R
NC2-2F
CTF-NC2BLK
VTF-NC2BLK
Contents
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On - POP
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - 1 - 2 - 3 - 4
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
Off - On
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
FWD - REV - NON
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
322
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
Off
FWD
NA
Off
Off
On
FWD
NA
Off
Off
Off
--------
On
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
Off
NA
Off
Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
FWD
NA
Off
On
FWD
NA
Off
Off
-------
---
---
-Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
Off
FWD
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
(No.)
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
(Offset
No.)
1088
UC
UC1EN
1089
CTF-UC1BLK
1090
UC2EN
1091
CTF-UC2BLK
1092 Thermal
THMEN
1093
THMAEN
1094
BCD
BCDEN
1226
BCD-2F
1095
CBF
BTC
1096
RTC
1097 Cold Load
CLEN
1098
CLDOEN
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
1245
1254
1255
1256
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
164
165
166
167
1253
1099
1100
1227
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
1228
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1241
1229
1230
1231
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1232
1233
1234
1235
3000
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
3001
12000
3002
3003
3004
3005
12001
3006
3007
3008
3009
12002
3010
12003
3011
3012
3013
RP
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
FRQ
DFRQ
OC
Units
5A rating
Contents
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - DIR - OC
Off - On
Off - On
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
RPCB
RP-UVBLK
RP-Power
Power
RP1EN
RP1-2F
CTF-RP1BLK
VTF-RP1BLK
RP2EN
RP2-2F
CTF-RP2BLK
Use - Nouse
NA - Block
Didable - Enable
Send / Receive
Off / On
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
NA - Block
Off - On
VTF-RP2BLK
OV1EN
OV2EN
OV3EN
Off - On
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - On
OV4EN
UV1EN
VTF-UV1BLK
UV2EN
VTF-UV2BLK
UV3EN
VTF-UV3BLK
UV4EN
VTF-UV4BLK
VBLKEN
ZOV1EN
VTF-ZV1BLK
ZOV2EN
VTF-ZV2BLK
NOV1EN
VTF-NV1BLK
NOV2EN
VTF-NV2BLK
FRQ1EN
FRQ2EN
FRQ3EN
FRQ4EN
DFRQ1EN
DFRQ2EN
DFRQ3EN
DFRQ4EN
OC
Off - On
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - On
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - On
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - On
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - On
Off - DT - IDMT - C
Off - On
Off - OF - UF
Off - OF - UF
Off - OF - UF
Off - OF - UF
Off - R - D
Off - R - D
Off - R - D
Off - R - D
-95 - 95
deg
OC1
TOC1
TOC1M
TOC1R
TOC1RM
OC2
TOC2
TOC2M
TOC2R
TOC2RM
OC3
TOC3
OC4
TOC4
OC1-k
OC1-
OC1-C
0.10 - 25.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.10 - 25.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.10 - 150.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.10 - 150.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
A
s
A
s
A
s
A
s
UC1 Enable
CTF block enable
UC2 Enable
CTF block enable
Thermal OL Enable
Thermal Alarm Enable
Broken Conductor Enable
2f Block Enable
Back-trip control
Re-trip control
Cold Load Protection Enable
Cold Load drop-off Enable
CB condition use
UV Bloxk Enable
Power Direction Enable
Power Direction
RP1 Ebnable
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
VTF block enable
RP2 Enable
2f Block Enable
CTF block enable
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
NA
Off
Off
Off
Off
Use
NA
Disable
Send
Off
NA
Off
Off
Off
NA
OFf
Off
Off
Off
Off
OV4 Enable
UV1 Enable
VTF block enable
UV2 Enable
VTF block enable
UV3 Enable
VTF block enable
UV4 Enable
VTF block enable
UV Block Enable
ZOV1 Enable
VTF block enable
ZOV2 Enable
VTF block enable
NOV1 Enable
VTF block enable
NOV2 Enable
VTF block enable
FRQ1 Enable
FRQ2 Enable
FRQ3 Enable
FRQ4 Enable
DFRQ1 Enable
DFRQ2 Enable
DFRQ3 Enable
DFRQ4 Enable
OC Characteristic Angle
Off
DT
Off
DT
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
323
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
-45
1.00
0.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
5.00
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
10.00
1.00
10.00
0.00
0.14
0.02
0.000
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
(Offset
No.)
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
12004
3024
3025
3026
3027
12005
3028
3029
3030
3031
12006
3032
12007
12008
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
12009
3046
3047
3048
12010
3049
12011
3050
3051
3052
3053
12012
3054
12013
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
3066
3067
3068
12014
3069
3070
3071
3072
12015
(No.)
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
Units
5A rating
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
Contents
OC1-kr
OC1-
OC2-k
OC2-
OC2-C
OC2-kr
OC2-
EF
EFV
EF1
TEF1
TEF1M
TEF1R
TEF1RM
EF2
TEF2
TEF2M
TEF2R
TEF2RM
EF3
TEF3
EF4
TEF4
TREBK
EF1-k
EF1-
EF1-C
EF1-kr
EF1-
EF2-k
EF2-
EF2-C
EF2-kr
EF2-
SE
SEV
SE1
TSE1
TSE1M
TSE1R
TSE1RM
TS1S2
SE2
TSE2
TSE2M
TSE2R
TSE2RM
SE3
TSE3
SE4
TSE4
RP
SE1-k
SE1-
SE1-C
SE1-kr
SE1-
SE2-k
SE2-
SE2-C
SE2-kr
SE2-
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
-95 - 95
0.5 - 100.0
0.05 - 25.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.05 - 25.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.05 - 100.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 10.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
-95 - 95
0.5 - 100.0
0.001 - 2.500
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.001 - 2.500
0.001 - 2.500
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.001 - 2.500
0.00 - 300.00
0.001 - 2.500
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 100.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
NC
NCV
NC1
TNC1
TNC1M
TNC1R
TNC1RM
NC2
TNC2
-95 - 95
0.5 - 25.0
0.10 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.10 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
deg
V
A
s
A
s
A
s
A
s
s
deg
V
A
s
s
A
s
A
s
A
s
W
deg
V
A
s
A
s
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
EF Characteristic Angle
EF ZPS voltage level
EF1 Threshold setting
EF1 EFinite time setting
EF1 Time multiplier setting
EF1 EFinite time reset delay
EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
EF2 Threshold setting
EF2 EFinite time setting
EF2 Time multiplier setting
EF2 EFinite time reset delay
EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
EF3 Threshold setting
EF3 EFinite time setting
EF4 Threshold setting
EF4 EFinite time setting
Current reverse blocking time
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
SEF Characteristic Angle
SEF ZPS voltage level
SEF1 Threshold setting
SEF1 Definite time setting
SEF1 Time multiplier setting
SEF1 Definite time reset delay
SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
SEF1 Stage 2 definite timer settings
SEF2 Threshold setting
SEF2 Definite time setting
SEF2 Time multiplier setting
SEF2 Definite time reset delay
SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
SEF3 Threshold setting
SEF3 Definite time setting
SEF4 Threshold setting
SEF4 Definite time setting
Residual Power Threshold
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
NOC Characteristic Angle
NOC NPS voltage level
NOC1 Threshold setting
NOC1 Definite time setting
NOC1 Time multiplier setting
NOC1 Definite time reset delay
NOC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
NOC2 Threshold setting
NOC2 Definite time setting
324
2.00
2.00
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
-45
3.0
0.30
0.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
3.00
0.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
5.00
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.10
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
-----------------------------
0
3.0
0.005
0.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
0.00
0.010
0.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
0.100
0.00
0.500
0.00
0.00
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
-45
3.0
2.0 / 0.40
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
1.0 / 0.20
1.00
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
(No.)
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
(Offset
No.)
3132
NOC
3158
3133
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3078
UC
12016
3079
12017
3080 Thermal
3081
3082
3083
3084
BCD
12018
3085
CBF
12019
12020
3159 Inrush
3139
3086 Cold Load
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
12021
12022
3101
12023
3197
RP
3199
3070
3071
3198
3200
3072
3073
3201
3102
OV
12024
3103
3104
3105
3106
12025
3140
3141
3107
3142
12065
3160
3143
12066
Units
5A rating
TNC2M
TNC2R
TNC2RM
NC1-k
NC1-
NC1-C
NC1-kr
NC1-
NC2-k
NC2-
NC2-C
NC2-kr
NC2-
UC1
TUC1
UC2
TUC2
THM
THMIP
TTHM
THMA
BCD
TBCD
CBF
TBTC
TRTC
ICD-2f
ICDOC
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SE1
SE2
SE3
SE4
NC1
NC2
BCD
TCLE
TCLR
ICLDO
TCLDO
RP1
RP1DPR
TRP1
TCBRP1
RP2
RP2DPR
TRP2
TCBRP2
RPVBLK
OV1
TOV1
TOV1M
TOV1R
OV1DPR
OV2
TOV2
TOV2M
TOV2R
OV2DPR
OV3
TOV3
OV3DPR
OV4
TOV4
Contents
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.10 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.10 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.40 - 10.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.5 - 500.0
50 - 99
0.10 - 1.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.10 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
10 - 50
1.00 - 25.00
0.10 - 25.00
0.10 - 25.00
0.10 - 150.00
0.10 - 150.00
0.05 - 25.00
0.05 - 25.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.001 - 2.500
0.001 - 2.500
0.001 - 2.500
0.001 - 2.500
0.10 - 10.0
0.10 - 10.0
0.10 - 1.00
0 - 10000
0 - 10000
0.10 - 10.0
0.00 - 100.00
-500.0 - -1.0
50 - 98
0.00 - 300.00
0.0 - 60.0
-500.0 - -1.0
50 - 98
0.00 - 300.00
0.0 - 60.0
40.0 - 100.0
10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
10 - 98
10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
10 - 98
10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
10 - 98
10.0 - 200.0
0.00 - 300.00
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
A
s
A
s
A
A
min
%
s
A
s
s
%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
s
s
A
s
W
%
s
s
W
%
s
s
V
V
s
s
%
V
s
s
%
V
s
%
V
s
325
1.000
0.0
1.000
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
0.40
1.00
0.20
0.00
1.00
0.00
10.0
80
0.20
0.00
0.50
1.00
0.50
15
0.10
2.00
5.00
20.00
40.00
2.00
5.00
20.00
40.00
-----
0.100
0.100
0.100
0.100
0.80
0.40
0.40
100
100
0.50
0.00
-30.0
95
0.20
5.0
-30.0
95
1.00
5.0
40.0
120.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
95
140.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
95
140.0
1.00
95
140.0
1.00
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
(No.)
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
Default Setting
Range
(Offset
No.)
3144
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3108
UV
12026
3109
3110
3111
12027
3145
3146
3147
12067
3148
12068
3112
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3113
ZOV
12028
3114
3115
3116
12029
3149
3150
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3117
NOV
12030
3118
3119
3120
12031
3151
3152
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3121
FRQ
12032
3122
12033
3123
12034
3124
12035
3125
3153 DFRQ
3154
3155
3156
3126 CTF/VTF
3127
3128
Units
Contents
OV4DPR
OV1-k
OV1-
OV1-C
OV2-k
OV2-
10 - 98
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
OV2-C
UV1
TUV1
TUV1M
TUV1R
UV2
TUV2
TUV2M
TUV2R
UV3
TUV3
UV4
TUV4
VBLK
UV1-k
UV1-
UV1-C
UV2-k
UV2-
UV2-C
ZOV1
TZOV1
TZOV1M
TZOV1R
ZOV2
TZOV2
TZOV2M
TZOV2R
ZOV1-k
ZOV1-
ZOV1-C
ZOV2-k
ZOV2-
ZOV2-C
NOV1
TNOV1
TNOV1M
TNOV1R
NOV2
TNOV2
TNOV2M
TNOV2R
NOV1-k
NOV1-
NOV1-C
NOV2-k
NOV2-
NOV2-C
FRQ1
TFRQ1
FRQ2
TFRQ2
FRQ3
TFRQ3
FRQ4
TFRQ4
FVBLK
DFRQ1
DFRQ2
DFRQ3
DFRQ4
EFF
OCDF
ZOVF
UVF
0.000 - 5.000
5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
5.0 - 130.0
0.00 - 300.00
5.0 - 20.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
1.0 - 160.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.05 - 100.00
0.0 - 300.0
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
-10.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 300.00
40.0 - 100.0
0.1 - 15.0
0.1 - 15.0
0.1 - 15.0
0.1 - 15.0
0.05 - 25.00
0.1(Fixed)
5.0 - 130.0
5.0 - 130.0
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
%
V
s
s
V
s
s
V
s
V
s
V
V
s
s
V
s
V
s
s
V
s
Hz
s
Hz
s
Hz
s
Hz
s
V
Hzs
Hzs
Hzs
Hzs
A
A
V
V
95
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
ditto
UV1 Threshold setting
UV1 Definite time setting
UV1 Time multiplier setting
UV1 Definite time reset delay
UV2 Threshold setting
UV2 Definite time setting
UV2 Time multiplier setting
UV2 Definite time reset delay
UV3 Threshold setting
UV3 Definite time setting
UV4 Threshold setting
UV4 Definite time setting
UV Blocking threshold
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
ditto
ditto
ZOV1 Threshold setting
ZOV1 Definite time setting
ZOV1 Time multiplier setting
ZOV1 Definite time reset delay
ZOV2 Threshold setting
ZOV2 Definite time setting
ZOV2 Time multiplier setting
ZOV2 Definite time reset delay
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV1
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV2
ditto
ditto
NOV1 Threshold setting
NOV1 Definite time setting
NOV1 Time multiplier setting
NOV1 Definite time reset delay
NOV2 Threshold setting
NOV2 Definite time setting
NOV2 Time multiplier setting
NOV2 Definite time reset delay
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV1
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV2
ditto
ditto
FRQ1 Threshold setting
FRQ1 Definite time setting
FRQ2 Threshold setting
FRQ2 Definite time setting
FRQ3 Threshold setting
FRQ3 Definite time setting
FRQ4 Threshold setting
FRQ4 Definite time setting
UV Blocking threshold
DFRQ1 Threshold setting.
DFRQ2 Threshold setting.
DFRQ3 Threshold setting.
DFRQ4 Threshold setting.
EF Threshold setting for CTF/VTF scheme.
OCD Threshold setting for CTF/VTF scheme.
ZOV Threshold setting for CTF/VTF scheme.
UV(Ph-G) Threshold setting for VTF scheme.
0.000
60.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
40.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
40.0
1.00
40.0
1.00
10.0
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
20.0
0.00
10.00
0.0
40.0
0.00
10.00
0.0
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
20.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
40.0
1.00
1.00
0.0
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
-1.00
1.00
-1.00
1.00
-1.00
1.00
-1.00
1.00
40.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.20
-20.0
51.0
326
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
(No.)
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
Default Setting
Range
(Offset
No.)
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1236
1237
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1238
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1239
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
Units
5A rating
ARC
ARCEN
ARC-NUM
VCHK
DfEN
VTPHSEL
VT-RATE
3PH-VT
OC1-INIT
OC1-TP1
OC1-TP2
OC1-TP3
OC1-TP4
OC1-TP5
OC1-TP6
OC2-INIT
OC2-TP1
OC2-TP2
OC2-TP3
OC2-TP4
OC2-TP5
OC2-TP6
OC3-INIT
OC3-TP1
OC3-TP2
OC3-TP3
OC3-TP4
OC3-TP5
OC3-TP6
OC4-INIT
OC4-TP1
OC4-TP2
OC4-TP3
OC4-TP4
OC4-TP5
OC4-TP6
COORD-OC
EF1-INIT
EF1-TP1
EF1-TP2
EF1-TP3
EF1-TP4
EF1-TP5
EF1-TP6
EF2-INIT
EF2-TP1
EF2-TP2
EF2-TP3
EF2-TP4
EF2-TP5
EF2-TP6
EF3-INIT
EF3-TP1
EF3-TP2
EF3-TP3
EF3-TP4
EF3-TP5
EF3-TP6
EF4-INIT
EF4-TP1
EF4-TP2
EF4-TP3
EF4-TP4
EF4-TP5
EF4-TP6
COORD-EF
SE1-INIT
SE1-TP1
SE1-TP2
SE1-TP3
SE1-TP4
SE1-TP5
Contents
Off - On
S1 - S2 - S3 - S4 - S5
Off - LD - DL - DD - S
Off - On
A - B- C
PH-G - PH-PH
Bus - Line
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - On
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - On
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
Autoreclosing Enable.
Reclosing shot max. number
Autoreclosing volatge check
Frequency difference checking enable
VT phase selection
VT rating
3ph. VT location
Autoreclosing initiation by OC1 enable
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
OC1 trip mode of 5th trip
OC1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC2 enable
OC2 trip mode of 1st trip
OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC3 enable
OC3 trip mode of 1st trip
OC3 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC3 trip mode of 4th trip
OC3 trip mode of 5th trip
OC3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC4 enable
OC4 trip mode of 1st trip
OC4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
OC relay for Co-ordination Enable
Autoreclosing initiation by EF1 enable
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
EF1 trip mode of 5th trip
EF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF2 enable
EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
EF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF2 trip mode of 4th trip
EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF3 enable
EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF3 trip mode of 4th trip
EF3 trip mode of 5th trip
EF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF4 enable
EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
EF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF4 trip mode of 4th trip
EF4 trip mode of 5th trip
EF4 trip mode of 6th trip
EF relay for Co-ordination Enable
Autoreclosing initiation by SEF1 enable
SEF1 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF1 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF1 trip mode of 5th trip
327
On
S1
Off
Off
A
PH-G
Line
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Off
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Off
-------
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
(Offset
No.)
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1240
1207
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
12036
12037
12038
12039
12040
12041
12042
12043
12044
12045
12046
12047
12048
12049
12050
12051
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
12052
12053
12054
12055
3129
3130
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
3131
22020 BI1 - BI2
22021
BI3 22040
BI1
22041
22000
22042
BI2
22043
22001
22044
BI3
22045
22002
22046
BI4
22047
22003
22048
BI5
(No.)
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
Units
5A rating
Contents
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
ARC
SE1-TP6
SE2-INIT
SE2-TP1
SE2-TP2
SE2-TP3
SE2-TP4
SE2-TP5
SE2-TP6
SE3-INIT
SE3-TP1
SE3-TP2
SE3-TP3
SE3-TP4
SE3-TP5
SE3-TP6
SE4-INIT
SE4-TP1
SE4-TP2
SE4-TP3
SE4-TP4
SE4-TP5
SE4-TP6
COORD-SE
EXT-INIT
ARC
TRDY
TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
TD5
TR5
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
OVB
UVB
OVL
UVL
SYNUV
SYNOV
SYNDV
SYN
SYNDf
TSYN
TLBDL
TDBLL
TDBDL
OC-CO
EF-CO
0.0 - 600.0
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.0 - 600.0
0.1 - 600.0
0.1 - 600.0
0.01 - 300.00
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
10 - 150
0 - 150
5 - 75
0.01 - 2.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.10 - 150.00
0.05 - 100.00
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
deg
Hz
s
s
s
s
A
A
Reclaim timer
1st shot Dead timer of Stage1
1st shot Reset timer of Stage1
2nd shot Dead timer of Stage1
2nd shot Reset timer of Stage1
3rd shot Dead timer of Stage1
3rd shot Reset timer of Stage1
4th shot Dead timer of Stage1
4th shot Reset timer of Stage1
5th shot Dead timer of Stage1
5th shot Reset timer of Stage1
Out put pulse timer
Autoreclosing Pause Time after manually close
Autoreclosing Recovery time after Final Trip
Autoreclosing Pause Time after manually close
ARC reset time in CB closing mode.
OV element of bus-voltage check
UV element of bus-voltage check
OV element of line-voltage check
UV element of line-voltage check
UV element of Synchro. check
OV element of Synchro. check
Voltage difference for SYN
Synchro. check (ph. diff.)
Frequency difference checking for SYN
Synchronism check timer (Live-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check timer (Live-bus & Dead-line)
Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Live-line)
Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Dead-line)
For Co-ordination
ditto
SE-CO
BITHR1
BITHR2
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
0.001 - 2.500
48 - 110 - 220
110 - 220
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
A
V
V
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
ditto
BI1 - BI2 Threshold voltage setting
BI3 - Threshold voltage setting
Binary Input Pick-up delay
Binary Input Drop-off delay
Binary Input Sense
Binary Input Pick-up delay
Binary Input Drop-off delay
Binary Input Sense
Binary Input Pick-up delay
Binary Input Drop-off delay
Binary Input Sense
Binary Input Pick-up delay
Binary Input Drop-off delay
Binary Input Sense
Binary Input Pick-up delay
328
------------------------
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Off
NA
60.0
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
2.00
3.0
10.0
10.0
3.00
51
13
51
13
83
51
150
30
1.00
1.00
0.05
0.05
0.05
2.00
0.60
--
0.200
110
110
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
(No.)
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
Range
(Offset
No.)
22049
22004
22050
22051
22005
22052
22053
22006
22054
22055
22007
22056
22057
22008
22058
22059
22009
22060
22061
22010
22062
22063
22011
22064
22065
22012
22066
22067
22013
22068
22069
22014
22070
22071
22015
22072
22073
22016
22074
22075
22017
23032
23033
23000
23001
23002
23003
23034
23035
23004
23005
23006
23007
23036
23037
23008
23009
23010
23011
23038
23039
23012
23013
23014
23015
23040
23041
23016
23017
23018
23019
23042
23043
Units
5A rating
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8
BI9
BI10
BI11
BI12
BI13
BI14
BI15
BI16
BI17
BI18
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Logic
Reset
Contents
1A rating
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
329
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
0.00
0.00
Nom
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
667
668
669
670
671
672
(Offset
No.)
23020
23021
23022
23023
23064
23065
23066
23067
23068
23069
23070
23080
23048
23049
23050
23051
23052
23053
23054
23055
23081
23056
23057
23058
23059
23060
23061
23062
23063
17000
17001
17162
17163
17164
17165
19000
19001
19002
19003
19004
19005
19006
19007
19008
19009
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
19010
18036
18024
18000
18001
18001
18002
18003
18004
18060
18061
18062
18063
18005
18007
18008
18009
18010
18064
18065
18066
18067
18043
18044
18045
18046
(No.)
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
Units
5A rating
LED6
Contents
1A rating
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
LED1
Color
LED2
Color
LED3
Color
LED4
Color
LED5
Color
LED6
Color
CB CLOSED COLOR
IND1
Reset
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
IND2
Reset
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
Plant name
Description
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
Modbus
Modbus2
IEC
IEC2
RS485BR
RS485BR2
IECBLK
RS485P
RS485P2
EtherP
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
R / G/ Y
R / G/ Y
R / G/ Y
R / G/ Y
R / G/ Y
R / G/ Y
R / G/ Y
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Specified by user
ditto
Specified by user
Specified by user
Specified by user
Specified by user
1 - 247
1 - 247
0 - 254
0 - 254
9.6 - 19.2
9.6 - 19.2
Normal - Blocked
Off - Modbus - IEC103
Off - Modbus - IEC103
Off - Modbus - DNP
EtherP2
FL
BITRN
Time1
Time2
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
TRIP
OC
EF
SEF
NC
OV
UV
ZOV
NOV
TCSPEN
CBSMEN
TCAEN
IyAEN
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
s
s
A
A
A
A
V
V
V
V
LED6 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED1 color
LED2 color
LED3 color
LED4 color
LED5 color
LED6 color
Virtual LED1 Reset operation
Virtual LED1 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Virtual LED2 Reset operation
Virtual LED2 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Plant name
Memorandum for user
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
Station address for Modbus
Statin address for Modbus 2
Station address for IEC103
Station address for IEC103
Baud rate for RS485 Port1
Baud rate for RS485 Port2
Monitor direction blocked
Protpcol on RS485 Port1
Protpcol on RS485 Port2
Protpcol on Ethernet1
Protpcol on Ethernet2
FL function use or not
Number of bi-trigger (on/off) events
Disturbance record
Disturbance record
Realy element for disturbance record initiation
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Disturbance record trigger use or not
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
CB condition super visor enable
Trip CounterAlarm Enable
I^y Alarm Enable
330
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
no-name
no-data
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
1
1
1
1
19.2
19.2
Normal
Modbus
Modbus
Modbus
Modbus
Off
100
0.3
2.0
2.00
0.60
--
0.200
0.40
120.0
60.0
20.0
20.0
On
On
On
--
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
(No.)
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
(Offset
No.)
18047
18048
18049
18050
18051
20000
20001
20002
20008
Default Setting
Range
Setting Device Name
Units
5A rating
OPTAEN
TCALM
IyALM
YVALUE
OPTALM
Display
Power
Current
Time sync
Contents
Off - On
1 - 10000
10 - 10000
1.0 - 2.0
100 - 5000
Pri - Sec - Pri-A
Send - Receive
Lag - Lead
Of - BI - IRI - IEC - SN
User setting
400A,401A,402A 420A,421A,422A
1A rating
E6
ms
331
Off
10000
10000
2.0
1000
Pro
Send
Lead
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
5. PLC default setting
Output
Signal
1536 OC1_BLOCK
1537 OC2_BLOCK
1538 OC3_BLOCK
1539 OC4_BLOCK
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544 EF1_BLOCK
1545 EF2_BLOCK
1546 EF3_BLOCK
1547 EF4_BLOCK
1548 EF1_PERMIT
1549 EF2_PERMIT
1550 EF3_PERMIT
1551 EF4_PERMIT
1552 SEF1_BLOCK
1553 SEF2_BLOCK
1554 SEF3_BLOCK
1555 SEF4_BLOCK
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560 NOC1_BLOCK
1561 NOC2_BLOCK
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568 UC1_BLOCK
1569 UC2_BLOCK
1570 CBF_BLOCK
1571
1572 THM_BLOCK
1573 THMA_BLOCK
1574 BCD_BLOCK
1575
1576 DFRQ1_BLOCK
1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK
1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK
1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584 OV1_BLOCK
1585 OV2_BLOCK
1586 OV3_BLOCK
1587 OV4_BLOCK
1588 UV1_BLOCK
1589 UV2_BLOCK
1590 UV3_BLOCK
1591 UV4_BLOCK
1592 ZOV1_BLOCK
1593 ZOV2_BLOCK
1594
1595
1596 NOV1_BLOCK
1597 NOV2_BLOCK
1598
1599
1600 FRQ1_BLOCK
1601 FRQ2_BLOCK
1602 FRQ3_BLOCK
1603 FRQ4_BLOCK
1604 ARC_BLOCK
1605 ARC_READY
1606 ARC_INIT
1607 MANUAL_CLOSE
1608 ARC_NO_ACT
1609
1610
Timing
Cycle
30
X
X
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
[771]BI4_COMMAND
[770]BI3_COMMAND
332
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
X
X
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Timer
Off
On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
RP1 BLOCK
RP2_BLOCK
CTF_BLOCK
VTF_BLOCK
EXT_CTF
EXT VTF
EXT_TRIP-A
EXT_TRIP-B
EXT TRIP-C
EXT_TRIP
TC_FAIL
CB N/O CONT
CB_N/C_CONT
X
X
[769]BI2 COMMAND
[1]CONSTANT_1
X
X
IND.RESET
[768]BI1 COMMAND
ARC-S1 COND
ARC-S2_COND
ARC-S3_COND
ARC-S4 COND
ARC-S5_COND
X
X
X
X
X
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
X
X
X
X
X
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
SGM_IY-A
SGM IY-B
SGM_IY-C
X
X
X
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
X
X
X
OT ALARM-A
OT_ALARM-B
OT_ALARM-C
X
X
X
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
X
X
X
FRQ_S1_TRIP
FRQ_S2_TRIP
FRQ S3 TRIP
FRQ_S4_TRIP
X
X
X
X
[356]FRQ1_TRIP + [360]DFRQ1_TRIP
[357]FRQ2_TRIP + [361]DFRQ2_TRIP
[358]FRQ3 TRIP + [362]DFRQ3 TRIP
[359]FRQ4_TRIP + [363]DFRQ4_TRIP
X
X
X
X
CBF_INIT-A
CBF INIT-B
CBF_INIT-C
CBF_INIT
TP COUNT-A
TP_COUNT-B
TP_COUNT-C
TP COUNT
333
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
OC1_INST_TP
OC2_INST_TP
OC3_INST_TP
OC4_INST_TP
EF1_INST_TP
EF2_INST_TP
EF3_INST_TP
EF4_INST_TP
SEF1_INST_TP
SEF2_INST_TP
SEF3_INST_TP
SEF4_INST_TP
334
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
335
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
336
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
337
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
338
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
339
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
340
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
341
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
342
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
343
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304 CONTROL_LOCK_BI
2305 REMOTE OP CMD
2306 REMOTE_CL_CMD
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
344
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
345
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
346
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 DISP.ALARM1
2561 DISP.ALARM2
2562 DISP.ALARM3
2563 DISP.ALARM4
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576 SYNC_CLOCK
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
347
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610 ALARM_LED_SET
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1
2625 F.RECORD2
2626 F.RECORD3
2627 F.RECORD4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1
2633 D.RECORD2
2634 D.RECORD3
2635 D.RECORD4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1
2641 SET.GROUP2
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656 CON_TPMD1
2657 CON TPMD2
2658 CON_TPMD3
2659 CON_TPMD4
2660 CON TPMD5
348
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2661 CON_TPMD6
2662 CON TPMD7
2663 CON_TPMD8
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684 ARC_COM_RECV
2685
2686 PROT COM RECV
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV
2689
2690 OP_CMD_RECV
2691 CL_CMD_RECV
2692 LOCK CMD RECV
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
349
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
350
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
TEMP001
TEMP002
TEMP003
TEMP004
TEMP005
TEMP006
TEMP007
TEMP008
TEMP009
TEMP010
TEMP011
TEMP012
TEMP013
TEMP014
TEMP015
TEMP016
TEMP017
TEMP018
TEMP019
TEMP020
TEMP021
TEMP022
TEMP023
TEMP024
TEMP025
TEMP026
TEMP027
TEMP028
TEMP029
TEMP030
TEMP031
TEMP032
TEMP033
TEMP034
TEMP035
TEMP036
TEMP037
TEMP038
TEMP039
TEMP040
TEMP041
TEMP042
TEMP043
TEMP044
TEMP045
TEMP046
TEMP047
TEMP048
TEMP049
TEMP050
TEMP051
TEMP052
TEMP053
TEMP054
TEMP055
TEMP056
TEMP057
TEMP058
TEMP059
TEMP060
TEMP061
TEMP062
TEMP063
TEMP064
TEMP065
TEMP066
TEMP067
TEMP068
TEMP069
TEMP070
351
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
TEMP071
TEMP072
TEMP073
TEMP074
TEMP075
TEMP076
TEMP077
TEMP078
TEMP079
TEMP080
TEMP081
TEMP082
TEMP083
TEMP084
TEMP085
TEMP086
TEMP087
TEMP088
TEMP089
TEMP090
TEMP091
TEMP092
TEMP093
TEMP094
TEMP095
TEMP096
TEMP097
TEMP098
TEMP099
TEMP100
TEMP101
TEMP102
TEMP103
TEMP104
TEMP105
TEMP106
TEMP107
TEMP108
TEMP109
TEMP110
TEMP111
TEMP112
TEMP113
TEMP114
TEMP115
TEMP116
TEMP117
TEMP118
TEMP119
TEMP120
TEMP121
TEMP122
TEMP123
TEMP124
TEMP125
TEMP126
TEMP127
TEMP128
TEMP129
TEMP130
TEMP131
TEMP132
TEMP133
TEMP134
TEMP135
TEMP136
TEMP137
TEMP138
TEMP139
TEMP140
TEMP141
TEMP142
TEMP143
TEMP144
TEMP145
352
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
TEMP146
TEMP147
TEMP148
TEMP149
TEMP150
TEMP151
TEMP152
TEMP153
TEMP154
TEMP155
TEMP156
TEMP157
TEMP158
TEMP159
TEMP160
TEMP161
TEMP162
TEMP163
TEMP164
TEMP165
TEMP166
TEMP167
TEMP168
TEMP169
TEMP170
TEMP171
TEMP172
TEMP173
TEMP174
TEMP175
TEMP176
TEMP177
TEMP178
TEMP179
TEMP180
TEMP181
TEMP182
TEMP183
TEMP184
TEMP185
TEMP186
TEMP187
TEMP188
TEMP189
TEMP190
TEMP191
TEMP192
TEMP193
TEMP194
TEMP195
TEMP196
TEMP197
TEMP198
TEMP199
TEMP200
TEMP201
TEMP202
TEMP203
TEMP204
TEMP205
TEMP206
TEMP207
TEMP208
TEMP209
TEMP210
TEMP211
TEMP212
TEMP213
TEMP214
TEMP215
TEMP216
TEMP217
TEMP218
TEMP219
TEMP220
353
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Output
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
354
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
6. Disturbance record setting
Name
Range
Unit
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
SIG8
SIG9
SIG10
SIG11
SIG12
SIG13
SIG14
SIG15
SIG16
SIG17
SIG18
SIG19
SIG20
SIG21
SIG22
SIG23
SIG24
SIG25
SIG26
SIG27
SIG28
SIG29
SIG30
SIG31
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
No.
101
102
103
261
131
281
141
291
201
202
203
341
211
351
0
371
401
1604
403
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default setting
Signal
110D
Signal Name
OC1-A
-OC1-B
-OC1-C
-OC1 TRIP
-EF1
x
EF1 TRIP
x
SEF1
x
SEF1-S1 TRIP
x
UV1-A
-UV1-B
-UV1-C
-UV1 TRIP
-ZOV1
x
ZOV1 TRIP
x
NA
GEN.TRIP
x
ARC READY T
x
ARC BLOCK
x
ARC SHOT
x
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
355
Model
400D
420D
x
x
x
x
x
x
---
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
--
-------------
-----
User Setting
Model
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
4. Function test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
356
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
1.
Relay identification
Type
Serial number
Model
System frequency
Station
Date
Circuit
Engineer
Protection scheme
Witness
Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3.
Hardware check
357
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.
Function test
Current setting
Measured current
Element
OC1-A
UC1-A
OC2-A
UC2-A
OC3-A
THM-A
OC4-A
THM-T
EF1
NOC1
EF2
NOC2
EF3
CBF-A
Current setting
Measured current
EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4
Curve setting
Multiplier setting
Changed current
OC1-A
Current setting
Current setting
Current setting
EF1
Current setting
Current setting
Current setting
SEF1
Current setting
Current setting
Current setting
Measured time
Current setting
Measured current
Element
OC1-A
SEF1
OC2-A
SEF2
OC3-A
SEF3
OC4-A
SEF4
EF1
NOC1
EF2
NOC2
EF3
EF4
358
Current setting
Measured current
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
4.2 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
(1) Operating value test
Element
Voltage
setting
Measured
voltage
Element
OV1
ZOV1
OV2
ZOV2
OV3
NOV1
OV4
NOV2
Voltage
setting
Measured
voltage
UV1
UV2
UV3
UV4
Voltage setting
Multiplier setting
Changed voltage
OV1
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
UV1
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
ZOV1
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
NOV1
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Measured time
Frequency setting
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
359
Measured frequency
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
5.
6.
7.
Conjunctive test
Scheme
Results
On load check
Tripping circuit
Reclosing circuit
360
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix J
Return Repair Form
361
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Type:
Model:
GRE140
(Example: Type:
GRE140
Model:
400A
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1.
2.
Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings
are very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on electronic
the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
362
media or fill in
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year
/
:
Time
/
:
15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Ia:
Ib :
Ic:
Ie:
Ise:
I1 :
I2 :
I2 / I1 :
Fault values
Ia:
Ib :
Ic:
Ie:
Ise:
I1 :
I2 :
I2 / I1 :
THM:
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Va :
Vb :
Vc :
Ves:
Vab:
Vbc:
Vca:
V0:
V1:
V2:
f:
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Va :
Vb :
Vc :
Ves:
Vab:
Vbc:
Vca:
V0:
V1:
V2:
f:
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz
363
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
3.
What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4.
5.
(Example: 10/July/2011)
6.
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
364
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix K
Technical Data
365
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC current In:
1/5A
AC voltage Vn:
100 - 240 V
Frequency:
50/60Hz
Auxiliary supply:
maximum 12%
DC supply interruption:
Overload Ratings
AC current inputs:
AC voltage inputs:
Burden
AC phase current inputs:
0.3VA
0.5VA
1.2VA
AC voltage inputs:
Power supply:
10W (quiescent)
15W (maximum)
Delay type:
DTL, IDMTL (IEC 60255-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI,
IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
DTL delay:
Reset Type:
rd
th
DTL delay:
95 to +95 in 1 steps
366
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Directional Earth Fault Protection (67N)
E/F 1st Overcurrent threshold:
Delay type:
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Type:
Reset Definite Delay:
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:
E/F 2nd threshold:
E/F 3rd, 4th thresholds:
DTL delay:
E/F Characteristic angle:
E/F directional voltage threshold:
DTL Delay:
Thermal alarm:
10 50% in 1% steps
1.0 25.0A in 0.1A steps
DTL delay:
367
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Directional Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Protection (67/46)
NOC 1st, 2nd threshold:
Delay type:
DTL, IDMTL(IEC 60255-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI,
IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
DTL delay:
Reset Type:
95 to +95 in 1 steps
DTL delay:
DO/PU ratio
10 98% in 1% steps
Reset Delay:
DTL delay:
Reset Delay:
Undervoltage Block
DTL delay:
Reset Delay:
DTL delay:
Reset Delay:
DTL delay:
Frequency UV Block
Frequency rate-of-change
Autoreclose (79)
0.01 10.00s
Sequences
368
in 0.01s steps
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
5 to 75 in 1 steps
UV element (SYUV)
10 to 150V in 1V steps
OV element (SYOV)
Voltage difference check (V)
10 to 150V in 1V steps
10 to 150V in 1V steps
0 to 150V in 1V steps
10 to 150V in 1V steps
50S threshold:
DTL delay:
1 300s in 1s steps
50 500% in 1% steps
1 300s in 1s steps
1 300s in 1s steps
50 500% in 1% steps
1 60 in 1 steps
Accuracy
Overcurrent Pick-ups:
approx, 95%
Undercurrent Pick-up:
approx, 105%
Overvoltage Pick-ups:
Undervoltage Pick-ups:
Over Frequency Pick-ups:
Under Frequency Pick-ups:
Frequency rate-of-change Pick-ups:
100% of setting 5%
100% of setting 5%
Frequency threshold 0.05Hz (setting: 5.00Hz )
Frequency threshold 0.05Hz (setting: 5.00Hz )
100% of setting 0.05Hz/s (setting: 5.00Hz/s)
369
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Frequency rate-of-change Operating Time
USB-Type B
Cable length:
5m (max.)
RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX
SC connector
IRIG-B122
4k-ohm
4Vp-p to 10Vp-p
Screw terminal
50 ohm coaxial cable
Binary Inputs
Number
Operating voltage
Binary Outputs
Number
Durability:
Pickup time
Reset time
Mechanical design
Weight
Width
223mm
370
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Height
177mm
Depth
Case colour
180mm
Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5
Installation
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test
Standards
Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC60068-2-1/2
IEC60068-2-30
Humidity
IEC60068-2-78
Enclosure Protection
IEC60529
Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC60255-21-1
Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
IEC60255-21-2
Seismic
IEC60255-21-3
Class 1
Dielectric Withstand
IEC60255-5
IEC60255-5
Electrical Environment
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency
Disturbance / Damped
Oscillatory Wave
IEC60255-22-1 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-12
IEEE C37. 90. 1
Electrostatic
Discharge
IEC60255-22-2 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC60255-22-3 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast Transient
Disturbance
IEC60255-22-4 Class A,
IEC61000-4-4
IEEE C37. 90. 1
Surge Immunity
IEC60255-22-5,
IEC61000-4-5
Conducted RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC60255-22-6 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-6
Power Frequency
Disturbance
IEC60255-22-7 Class A,
IEC61000-4-16
371
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Conducted and
Radiated Emissions
IEC60255-25 Class A,
EN55022 Class A,
IEC61000-6-4
Conducted emissions:
0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB
73/23/EEC
372
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix L
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
373
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with
Marked with
: Signal number
Marked with
Signal No.
Signal name
Marked with [
"
Unmarked
Scheme switch
AND gates
A
B
&
Output
&
Output
C
A
B
A
1
B
C
1
1
Other cases
Output
1
0
A
1
B
C
1
0
Other cases
Output
1
0
A
1
B
C
0
0
Other cases
Output
1
0
C
A
B
&
Output
Output
A
0
B
C
0
0
Other cases
Output
0
1
Output
A
0
B
C
0
1
Other cases
Output
0
1
Output
A
0
B
C
1
1
Other cases
Output
0
1
OR gates
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
374
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Signal inversion
A
A
0
1
Output
Output
1
0
Timer
t
XXX:
Set time
XXX
0
XXX:
Set time
XXX
t
One-shot timer
A
Output
Output
XXX - YYY
S
F/F
Output
R
0
0
1
1
Output
No change
1
0
0
Scheme switch
A
Output
ON
Output
ON
375
A
Switch
1
ON
Other cases
Switch
ON
OFF
Output
1
0
Output
1
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix M
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
376
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in the same CD as RSM100, and can be installed
easily as follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the Setup.exe of the folder IEC103Conf under the root directory, and
operate it according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start][Programs][IEC103 Configurator][IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual for the IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking the
[Help][Manual] in the IEC103 Configurator.
Requirements for IEC60870-5-103 master station
Polling cycle: 150ms or more
IEC103 master
GR relay
Data request
Polling cycle:
150ms or more
Response frame
Data request
Response frame
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of devices, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool IEC103 configurator.
(For details, refer to IEC103 configurator manual No.6F2S0839.)
-
377
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
CAUTION: Register Items into No.1 64. It becomes invalid when it registers after No.65.
-
Items for Measurands: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of
measurand quantities
Common setting
Transmission cycle of Measurand frame
FUN of System function
Test mode, etc.
CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via USB, turn off the DC supply to the
relay and turn on again.
3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values can be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported
commands with a cause of transmission (COT) negative acknowledgement of a command.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.4.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing
in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION test
mode. This means that the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 test mode is used for
messages normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.5.
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and
measurands are no longer transmitted.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.6.
3.2 List of Information
The following are the default settings.
378
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
IEC103 Configurator Default setting
INF
Description
Contents
GI Type
ID
COT
FUN
DPI
Signal No. OFF ON
--
10
255
--
--
--
Time Synchronization
--
255
--
--
--
Reset FCB
--
219
--
--
--
Reset CU
Reset CU ACK
--
219
--
--
--
Start/Restart
Relay start/restart
--
219
--
--
--
Power On
1411
Not supported
Status Indications
16 Auto-recloser active
17 Teleprotection active
18 Protection active
19 LED reset
GI
1, 7, 11, 12
219
Not supported
GI
1, 7, 12
219
1413
--
1, 7, 11, 12
219
1409
--
GI
11
219
1241
GI
11
219
1242
23 Characteristic1
GI
1, 7, 11, 12
219
1243
24 Characteristic2
GI
1, 7, 11, 12
219
1244
25 Characteristic3
Not supported
26 Characteristic4
Not supported
27 Auxiliary input1
Binary input 1
No set
28 Auxiliary input2
Binary input 2
No set
29 Auxiliary input3
Binary input 3
No set
30 Auxiliary input4
Binary input 4
No set
Not supported
Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I
GI
1, 7
219
1266
33 Measurand supervision V
GI
1, 7
219
1268
GI
1, 7
219
1269
GI
1, 7
219
1270
386
37 I>>backup operation
Not supported
38 VT fuse failure
VT failure
39 Teleprotection disturbed
GI
1, 7
219
46 Group warning
Only alarming
GI
1, 7
219
1259
47 Group alarm
GI
1, 7
219
1252
48 Earth Fault L1
GI
1, 7
219
800
49 Earth Fault L2
GI
1, 7
219
801
50 Earth Fault L3
GI
1, 7
219
802
GI
1, 7
219
803
GI
1, 7
219
804
Not supported
379
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Description
Contents
GI
Type
COT
FUN
ID
DPI
Signal NO. OFF
ON
Fault Indications
64
Start/pick-up L1
GI
1, 7
219
805
65
Start/pick-up L2
GI
1, 7
219
806
2
2
66
Start/pick-up L3
GI
1, 7
219
807
67
Start/pick-up N
GI
1, 7
219
808
68
General trip
Any trip
--
1, 7
219
371
--
69
Trip L1
--
1, 7
219
372
--
70
Trip L2
--
1, 7
219
373
--
71
Trip L3
--
1, 7
219
374
--
72
Trip I>>(back-up)
Back up trip
73
Fault location
--
1, 7
219
1048
--
--
74
--
1, 7
219
816
--
75
Fault reverse/Busbar
Reverse fault
--
1, 7
219
817
--
76
Not supported
77
Not supported
78
Zone1
Zone 1 trip
Not supported
79
Zone2
Zone 2 trip
Not supported
80
Zone3
Zone 3 trip
Not supported
81
Zone4
Zone 4 trip
Not supported
82
Zone5
Zone 5 trip
Not supported
83
Zone6
Zone 6 trip
84
General Start/Pick-up
GI
1, 7
219
1279
85
Breaker Failure
--
1, 7
219
818
--
86
Not supported
87
Not supported
88
Not supported
89
90
Trip I>
--
1, 7
219
819
--
91
Trip I>>
--
1, 7
219
820
--
No set
Not supported
Not supported
92
Trip IN>
--
1, 7
219
821
--
93
Trip IN>>
--
1, 7
219
822
--
--
1, 7
219
403
--
Autoreclose block
GI
1, 7
400
Autoreclose indications
128
CB 'ON' by Autoreclose
129
CB 'ON' by long-time
Autoreclose
130
Autoreclose Blocked
Not supported
Tbl
Offset
Data type
Coeff
219
26
short
0.1
380
219
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Description
Contents
GI
Type
ID
COT
FUN
Max. No.
Measurands
144
Measurand I
Ib <meaurand I>
--
2, 7
219
145
Measurand I,V
--
2, 7
219
146
Measurand I,V,P,Q
--
2, 7
219
147
Measurand IN,VEN
--
2, 7
219
148
--
2, 7
219
Generic Function
240
Read Headings
Not supported
241
Not supported
243
Not supported
244
Not supported
245
End of GGI
Not supported
249
Not supported
250
Not supported
251
Not supported
Tbl
Limit
Coeff
Lower
Upper
144
Ib
80
long
4095
0.4096
145
Ib
80
long
4095
0.4096
Vab
24
long
4095
1.86182
Ib
80
long
4095
1.70667
Vab
24
long
4095
1.8618
216
long
-4096
4095
0.000387
224
long
-4096
4095
0.000387
Ie
152
long
4095
0.04608
Ve
144
long
4095
1.07507
Ia
72
long
4095
0.4096
Ib
80
long
4095
0.4096
Ic
88
long
4095
0.4096
Va
long
4095
3.2252
146
147
148
Vb
long
4095
3.2252
Vc
16
long
4095
3.2252
216
long
-4096
4095
0.000387
224
long
-4096
4095
0.000387
184
long
4095
0.68267
381
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
INF
Description
Contents
Type
ID
COT
FUN
--
255
--
255
20
20
219
Time synchronization
General commands
16
Auto-recloser on/off
17
Teleprotection on/off
ON/OFF
Not supported
18
Protection on/off
(*1)
ON/OFF
20
20
219
19
LED reset
ON
20
20
219
23
Activate characteristic 1
Setting Group 1
ON
20
20
219
24
Activate characteristic 2
Setting Group 2
ON
20
20
219
25
Activate characteristic 3
Setting Group 3
26
Activate characteristic 4
Setting Group 4
27
CB OPEN
ON
20
20
219
28
CB CLOSE
ON
20
20
219
29
INTERLOCK ON / OFF
ON
20
20
219
30
OPERATION ENABLE
ON
20
20
219
Not supported
Not supported
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241
entries of one group
Read directory of a single
243
entry
Read values or attributes of a
244
single entry
General Interrogation of
245
generic data
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
248
Write entry
Not supported
249
Not supported
250
Not supported
(1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, the "IN SERVICE LED" is off.
DCO
Sig off
Sig on
16
2684
2684
17
2686
2686
18
2686
2686
19
2688
200
23
2640
1000
Rev
Valid time
0
0
0
24
2641
1000
27
2690
200
29
2691
200
30
2692
2692
31
2693
2693
0
0
: signal reverse
382
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Description
Contents
GRE140
supported
Yes
Yes
Disturbance data
No
Generic services
No
Private data
No
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
value times
Measurand
Current L1
Ia
Configurable
Current L2
Ib
Configurable
Current L3
Ic
Configurable
Voltage L1-E
Va
Configurable
Voltage L2-E
Vb
Configurable
Voltage L3-E
Vc
Configurable
Active power P
Configurable
Reactive power Q
Configurable
Frequency f
Configurable
Voltage L1 - L2
Vab
No set
383
Comment
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)
384
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:
(1) Naming for IEC103setting data
The file extension of IEC103 setting data is .csv. It is recommended that the version name is
provided with a revision number in order to be able to accommodate future changes as follows:
First draft:
_01.csv
Second draft:
_02.csv
Third draft:
_03.csv
Revision number
The name is recommended in order to be able to discriminate the relay type such as
GRE110 or GRE140, etc. The setting files remark field for IEC103 can accept up to 12
one-byte characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.
385
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix O
Inverse Time Characteristics
386
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
100
100
10
10
TMS
1.5
1.
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.1
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Normal Inverse
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Very Inverse
387
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
100
10
100
1000
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
TMS
1.5
10
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Extremely Inverse
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
388
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
IEEE Inverse Curves (MI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
10
10
100
100
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.5
TM
1
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Moderately Inverse
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Very Inverse
389
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
IEEE Inverse Curves (EI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100
10
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Extremely Inverse
390
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
US Inverse Curves (CO8)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
10
100
10
1
Operating Time (s)
TMS
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.5
0.1
1.0
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
CO8 Inverse
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
391
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Appendix P
Ordering
392
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Ordering
Directional Overcurrent Relay
GRE140
Type:
Directional Overcurrent / Motor protection Relay
Model:
- Model 400: Three phase and earth fault
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
12 x BIs, 10 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
18 x BIs, 16 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
- Model 420: Three phase and sensitive earth fault
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
12 x BIs, 10 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
18 x BIs, 16 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
- Model 700: Motor protection
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
12 x BIs, 10 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
18 x BIs, 16 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
- Model 720: Motor protection
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
12 x BIs, 10 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
18 x BIs, 16 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
Rating:
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc
Standard and language:
IEC (English)
ANSI (English)
Chinese
Communication:
RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
RS485 2ports (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
RS485 2ports (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
GRE140
393
400
401
402
420
421
422
700
701
702
720
721
722
1
2
A
0
1
2
10
11
20
21
A0
A1
B0
B1
C0
C1
D0
D1
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 7
Version-up Records
Version
No.
0.0
1.0
1.2
2.0
Date
Jul. 28, 2011
Jun.11,2012
Jun.28,2012
Oct.29.2012
Revised Section
--Appendix
Section 3.5
Appendix G
Appendix K
Appendix P
Contents
First issue
Modified the description.
Modified Appendix G.
Modified Metering Function. (Demand; WH, varH )
Modified the diagram.
Modified the Technical data.
Modified the Ordering.
394